Lexus OM33A07U

User Manual: Lexus 2013 Lexus ES 350 Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 423 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2013 ES350/ES300H Navigation System Owners Manual (OM33A07U)

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:16

1QUICK GUIDE 9

2BASIC FUNCTION 31

3NAVIGATION SYSTEM 66

4PHONE 143

5AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM 206

6AIR CONDITIONING 291

7VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 307

8INFORMATION 321

9LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY

CONNECT 345

10 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM 373

INDEX 385

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

Introduction

This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual

carefully to ensure proper use. Keep this manual in your vehicle at all times.

The screen shots in this document and the actual screens of the navigation system dif-

fer depending on whether the functions and/or a contract existed and the map data

available at the time of producing this document.

The Navigation System is one of the most technologically advanced vehicle accesso-

ries ever developed. The system receives satellite signals from the Global Positioning

System (GPS) operated by the U.S. Department of Defense. Using these signals and

other vehicle sensors, the system indicates your present position and assists in locating

a desired destination.

The navigation system is designed to select efficient routes from your present starting

location to your destination. The system is also designed to direct you to a destination

that is unfamiliar to you in an efficient manner. The system uses DENSO maps. The cal-

culated routes may not be the shortest nor the least traffic congested. Your own per-

sonal local knowledge or “short cut” may at times be faster than the calculated routes.

The navigation system’s database includes Point of Interest categories to allow you to

easily select destinations such as restaurants and hotels. If a destination is not in the da-

tabase, you can enter the street address or a major intersection close to it and the sys-

tem will guide you there.

The system will provide both a visual map and audio instructions. The audio instructions

will announce the distance remaining and the direction to turn in when approaching an

intersection. These voice instructions will help you keep your eyes on the road and are

timed to provide enough time to allow you to maneuver, change lanes or slow down.

Please be aware that all current vehicle navigation systems have certain limitations that

may affect their ability to perform properly. The accuracy of the vehicle’s position de-

pends on satellite conditions, road configuration, vehicle condition or other circum-

stances. For more information on the limitations of the system, refer to pages 139

through 141.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

For safety reasons, this manual indicates items requiring particular attention with the

following marks.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL

CAUTION

●This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is

ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of

injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

●This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment

if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to

avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

SYMBOLS USED IN ILLUSTRATIONS

Safety symbol

The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”,

“Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen.”

Arrows indicating operations

Indicates the action (pushing, turn-

ing, etc.) used to operate switches

and other devices.

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

■INFORMATION FOR HYBRID VEHICLES IS WRITTEN IN BRACKETS

NEXT TO THE INFORMATION FOR GASOLINE VEHICLES

Different writing styles for gasoline and hybrid vehicles

Example

When the “START STOP ENGINE”*1 <“POWER”> *2 switch is in ACCESSORY or

IGNITION ON*1 <ON>*2 mode, the initial screen will be displayed and the system

will begin operating.

*1: Gasoline vehicle

*2: Hybrid vehicle

HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

No. Name Description

Operational

Outlines An outline of the operation is explained.

Main Operations The steps of an operation are explained.

Related Operations A main operation’s supplementary operations are described.

Information Useful information for the user is described.

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

To use this system in the safest possible

manner, follow all the safety tips shown be-

low.

This system is intended to assist in reaching

the destination and, if used properly, can do

so. The driver is solely responsible for the

safe operation of your vehicle and the safety

of your passengers.

Do not use any feature of this system to the

extent it becomes a distraction and pre-

vents safe driving. The first priority while

driving should always be the safe operation

of the vehicle. While driving, be sure to ob-

serve all traffic regulations.

Prior to the actual use of this system, learn

how to use it and become thoroughly famil-

iar with it. Read the entire Navigation Sys-

tem Owner’s Manual to make sure you

understand the system. Do not allow other

people to use this system until they have

read and understood the instructions in this

manual.

For your safety, some functions may be-

come inoperable when driving. Unavailable

screen buttons are dimmed. Only when the

vehicle is not moving, can the destination

and route selection be done.

While driving, listen to the voice instructions

as much as possible and glance at the

screen briefly and only when it is safe. How-

ever, do not totally rely on voice guidance.

Use it just for reference. If the system can-

not determine the current position correct-

ly, there is a possibility of incorrect, late, or

non-voice guidance.

The data in the system may occasionally be

incomplete. Road conditions, including

driving restrictions (no left turns, street clo-

sures, etc.) frequently change. Therefore,

before following any instructions from the

system, look to see whether the instruction

can be done safely and legally.

This system cannot warn about such things

as the safety of an area, condition of streets,

and availability of emergency services. If un-

sure about the safety of an area, do not drive

into it. Under no circumstances is this sys-

tem a substitute for the driver’s personal

judgement.

Use this system only in locations where it is

legal to do so. Some states/provinces may

have laws prohibiting the use of video and

navigation screens next to the driver.

SAFETY INSTRUCTION

CAUTION

●For safety, the driver should not operate

the navigation system while he/she is

driving. Insufficient attention to the road

and traffic may cause an accident.

●While driving, be sure to obey the traffic

regulations and maintain awareness of

the road conditions. If a traffic sign on the

road has been changed, route guidance

may not have the updated information

such as the direction of a one way street.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION.....................10

Remote Touch........................................................... 10

MAP SCREEN......................................................... 12

REGISTERING HOME....................................... 14

REGISTERING PRESET

DESTINATIONS................................................. 16

OPERATION FLOW:

GUIDING THE ROUTE..................................18

SETTING HOME

AS THE DESTINATION.................................. 19

2. FUNCTION INDEX .....................................20

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

FUNCTION INDEX.........................................20

3. QUICK REFERENCE..................................22

“Menu” SCREEN ...................................................22

“Destination” SCREEN........................................24

“Setup” SCREEN....................................................26

“Information” SCREEN........................................28

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE

OPERATION ...............................................32

INITIAL SCREEN ..................................................32

HOW TO USE THE Remote Touch .............33

INPUTTING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/

LIST SCREEN OPERATION.......................35

SCREEN ADJUSTMENT..................................38

MAP SCREEN OPERATION.........................40

2. SETUP................................................................. 51

GENERAL SETTINGS ........................................ 51

VOICE SETTINGS...............................................62

1. DESTINATION SEARCH............................68

DESTINATION SEARCH ................................68

STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE ............... 87

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE...................................90

ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN....................90

TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE

PROMPTS............................................................. 93

DISTANCE AND TIME TO

DESTINATION .................................................. 96

SETTING AND DELETING

DESTINATIONS.................................................97

SETTING ROUTE................................................. 99

3. ADDRESS BOOK.......................................108

NAVIGATION SETTINGS............................108

4. SETUP.............................................................. 125

DETAILED NAVIGATION

SETTINGS............................................................125

VEHICLE SETTINGS.........................................133

5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING

SYSTEM)...................................................... 139

LIMITATIONS OF THE

NAVIGATION SYSTEM .............................139

1QUICK GUIDE

2BASIC FUNCTION

3NAVIGATION SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1. PHONE OPERATION................................144

QUICK REFERENCE .......................................144

PHONE (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM

FOR CELLULAR PHONE) ........................146

CALL ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE ........ 157

RECEIVE ON THE Bluetooth®

PHONE.................................................................165

TALK ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE.........166

Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE

FUNCTION........................................................169

2. SETUP .............................................................. 172

PHONE SETTINGS ........................................... 172

Bluetooth® SETTINGS......................................194

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

OPERATION............................................ 208

QUICK REFERENCE .....................................208

SOME BASICS.....................................................210

RADIO OPERATION....................................... 217

HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY

INFORMATION .............................................. 221

RADIO OPERATION (XM Satellite

Radio BROADCAST) ...................................226

RADIO OPERATION (INTERNET

RADIO BROADCAST)...............................232

DVD PLAYER OPERATION.......................233

USB MEMORY OPERATION....................254

iPod OPERATION............................................ 260

Bluetooth® AUDIO OPERATION............264

AUDIO/VIDEO REMOTE

CONTROLS (STEERING

SWITCHES).......................................................275

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

OPERATING HINTS ....................................277

2. SETUP ............................................................ 288

AUDIO SETTINGS...........................................288

1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

OPERATION.............................................292

QUICK REFERENCE......................................292

SOME BASICS ...................................................294

AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING

SYSTEM ..............................................................295

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

OPERATION............................................ 308

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM................. 308

NATURAL SPEECH

INFORMATION

(ENGLISH ONLY) ......................................... 314

EXPANDED VOICE

COMMANDS .................................................. 316

COMMAND LIST ...............................................317

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY ......................322

MAP DATABASE VERSION

AND COVERAGE AREA......................... 322

2. XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW...............324

XM SERVICES....................................................324

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION.............327

XM Sports .............................................................. 327

XM Stocks..............................................................330

XM Fuel Prices.....................................................333

XM NavWeather™............................................337

XM NavTraffic®................................................... 341

4. SETUP..............................................................344

XM SETTINGS....................................................344

4PHONE

5AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

6AIR CONDITIONING

7VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

8INFORMATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY

CONNECT-OVERVIEW..................... 346

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW.......................346

TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED

BY USING A CELLULAR

PHONE ...............................................................347

TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED

BY USING DCM AND THE

NAVIGATION SYSTEM............................352

TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED

BY USING DCM........................................... 355

2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY

CONNECT OPERATION................... 356

APPS.........................................................................356

Destination Assist................................................363

eDestination...........................................................365

Lexus Insider......................................................... 368

1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM........ 374

REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM............374

REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

PRECAUTIONS..............................................378

THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW ........... 383

ALPHABETICAL INDEX............................. 386

9LEXUS ENFORM WITH

SAFETY CONNECT

10 PERIPHERAL MONITORING

SYSTEM

INDEX

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.04.18 16:47

1. Remote Touch............................................... 10

2. MAP SCREEN.............................................. 12

3. REGISTERING HOME............................. 14

4. REGISTERING PRESET

DESTINATIONS....................................... 16

5. OPERATION FLOW:

GUIDING THE ROUTE......................... 18

6. SETTING HOME AS THE

DESTINATION ......................................... 19

1. NAVIGATION SYSTEM

FUNCTION INDEX............................... 20

1. “Menu” SCREEN........................................ 22

2. “Destination” SCREEN............................. 24

3. “Setup” SCREEN ........................................ 26

4. “Information” SCREEN............................. 28

1NAVIGATION OPERATION

2FUNCTION INDEX

3QUICK REFERENCE

QUICK GUIDE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:23

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION

1. Remote Touch

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION

QUICK GUIDE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:23

No. Name Function Page

“MENU” button Press to display the “Menu” screen. 22

“ · ” button Press to change the scale of the map and to scroll

the list screen. 33, 36, 48

“MAP/VOICE”

button

Press to repeat a voice guidance, cancel the

screen scroll, start guidance, and display the cur-

rent position.

Remote Touch

knob

Move in the desired direction to select a function,

letter and map screen button.

Press to enter the selected function, letter or map

screen button.

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:23

2. MAP SCREEN

No. Name Function Page

North-up or

heading-up

symbol

This symbol indicates whether the map orienta-

tion is set to north-up or heading-up. Selecting this

symbol changes the map orientation. Both north-

up and heading-up symbols display the vehicles

direction as a letter (e.g. N for north).

Scale indicator This figure indicates the map scale. 48

Zoom out button Select to reduce the map scale. 48

“ Off”

Select to obtain a broader view. Some of the but-

tons on the screen will not be displayed. They are

displayed again by selecting “On ”.

130

“Mark” Select to register the current position or the cur-

sor position as an address book entry. 41

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION

QUICK GUIDE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:23

*: Press and hold the “PWR·VOL” knob for 3 seconds or more to turn off the screen and restart the

navigation system. Do this when the vehicle-mounted device response is extremely slow.

“Route” Select to change the route. 97, 99

“Show on Map”

Select to browse information about guidance

route, to set the POI (Point of Interest) icons to be

displayed on the screen, to record the route, etc.

104, 342,

367

Zoom in button Select to magnify the map scale. 48

Foot print map

button

Select to display the foot print map and the build-

ing information. 48

“Map Mode” Select to display the “Map Mode” screen. 45

Distance and

time to destina-

tion

Select to display the distance, estimated travel

and arrival time to the destination. 96

XM indicator This mark is displayed when XM information is re-

ceived. 340, 342

“GPS” mark

(Global Position-

ing System)

Whenever the vehicle is receiving signals from the

GPS, this mark is displayed. 139

INFORMATION

●Remove dirt from the display and its surrounding area by lightly wiping with a soft, dry cloth,

such as a cloth used for cleaning glasses with plastic lenses. Scrubbing too hard or using a

hard cloth could scratch the display. Also, the display is treated with a coating, and could be

damaged by coming into contact with benzine or alkaline solution.

●When the screen is viewed through polarized sunglasses, a rainbow pattern may appear on

the screen due to optical characteristics of the screen. If this is disturbing, please operate

the screen without polarized sunglasses.

No. Name Function Page

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:23

3. REGISTERING HOME

Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

Select “Destination” and press the

Remote Touch knob.

Select “Go Home” and press the

Remote Touch knob.

If a home address has not been regis-

tered, it can be registered by selecting

“Go Home”.

Select “Yes” and press the Remote

Tou ch k no b .

There are 4 different methods to

search your home. (See “DESTINA-

TION SEARCH” on page 68.)

Select “Enter” and press the

Remote Touch knob.

The “Edit Home” screen is displayed.

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION

QUICK GUIDE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:23

Select “OK” and press the Remote

To u ch k n o b.

Registration of home is complete.

Home can also be registered by selecting

“Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. (See

“REGISTERING HOME” on page 109.)

The name, location, phone number and

icon can be changed. (See “EDITING

HOME” on page 110.)

The registered points can be used on the

“Destination” screen. (See “DESTINA-

TION SEARCH BY HOME” on page

69.)

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:23

4. REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS

Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

Select “Destination” and press the

Remote Touch knob.

Select one of the preset destination

buttons and press the Remote

To u ch k no b .

A preset destination can be set to any pre-

set destination button that has not yet

been set.

Select “Yes” and press the Remote

Tou ch k no b .

There are 4 different methods to

search preset destinations. (See

“DESTINATION SEARCH” on

page 68.)

Select “Enter” and press the

Remote Touch knob.

The “Edit Preset Destination” screen is

displayed.

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION

QUICK GUIDE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:23

Select “OK” and press the Remote

To u ch k n o b.

Registration of preset destinations is com-

plete.

Preset destinations can also be registered

by selecting “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen. (See “REGISTERING PRESET

DESTINATIONS” on page 112.)

The name, location, phone number and

icon can be changed. (See “EDITING

PRESET DESTINATIONS” on page 113.)

The registered points can be used on the

“Destination” screen. (See “DESTINA-

TION SEARCH BY PRESET DESTINA-

TIONS” on page 69.)

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:23

5. OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE ROUTE

Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

Select “Destination” and press the

Remote Touch knob.

There are 11 different methods to

search destinations. (See “DESTI-

NATION SEARCH” on page 68.)

Page 1

Page 2

Select “Go to ” and press the

Remote Touch knob.

The navigation system performs a search

for the route.

Select “OK” and press the Remote

Touch knob. Then start driving.

Routes other than the one recommended

can also be selected. (See “STARTING

ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 87.)

Guidance to the destination is displayed

on the screen and can be heard via voice

guidance.

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION

QUICK GUIDE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:23

6. SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION

Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

Select “Destination” and press the

Remote Touch knob.

Select “Go Home” and press the

Remote Touch knob.

“Go Home” can be used if your home ad-

dress has been registered. (To register

home, see “REGISTERING HOME” on

page 109.)

Your home address is set as the destina-

tion. The navigation system performs a

search for the route.

Select “OK” and press the Remote

Touch knob. Then start driving.

Routes other than the one recommended

can also be selected. (See “STARTING

ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 87.)

Guidance to the destination is displayed

on the screen and can be heard via voice

guidance.

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:23

2. FUNCTION INDEX

1. NAVIGATION SYSTEM FUNCTION INDEX

Map

Route guidance

Displaying maps Page

Viewing the map screen 12

Displaying the current position 40

Viewing the current position vicinity map 40

Changing the scale 48

Changing the map orientation 49

Displaying Points of Interest 104

Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination 96

Selecting the map mode 45

Deleting map screen buttons 130

Displaying traffic information 341

Searching destinations Page

Searching the destination 68

Changing the selected search area 68

Operating the map location of the selected destination 87

Before starting route guidance Page

Setting the destination 87

Viewing alternative routes 88

Starting route guidance 87

Before starting or during route guidance Page

Viewing the route 87

Adding destinations 97

Changing the route 99

Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination 96

2. FUNCTION INDEX

QUICK GUIDE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:23

Useful functions

During route guidance Page

Pausing route guidance 103

Adjusting route guidance volume 63

Deleting the destination 98

Displaying the entire route map 100

Address book Page

Registering address book entries 114

Marking icons on the map 116

Information Page

Displaying vehicle maintenance 133

Hands-free system (for cellular phone) Page

Initiating Bluetooth®146

Making a call on a Bluetooth® phone 157

Receiving a call on the Bluetooth® phone 165

Voice command system Page

Operating the system with your voice 308

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:23

3. QUICK REFERENCE

1. “Menu” SCREEN

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the “Menu” screen.

3. QUICK REFERENCE

QUICK GUIDE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:23

No. Name Function Page

“Destination” Select to display the “Destination” screen.

14, 16, 18, 19,

24, 68,

363, 365

“Info/Apps”

(“Info”)

Select to display the “Information” screen.

For vehicles sold in Canada, “Info” is used instead

of “Info/Apps”.

28, 322,

327, 330,

333, 337,

341, 356,

359, 368

“Display” Select to adjust the contrast and brightness of the

screens, turn the display off, etc. 38

“Setup” Select to display the “Setup” screen.

26, 51, 62,

108, 125,

133, 172,

194, 288,

344, 371

“Phone” Select to display the hands-free operation screen. 152

“Climate” Select to display the air conditioning control

screen. 294

“Media” Select to display the media control screen. 211

“Radio” Select to display the radio control screen. 211

3. QUICK REFERENCE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:23

2. “Destination” SCREEN

The “Destination” screen enables a destination search. Press the “MENU” button on

the Remote Touch, then select “Destination” to display the “Destination” screen.

No. Name Function Page

“Address” Select to input a house number and the street ad-

dress using the input keys. 70

“Point of Interest” Select one of the POIs that have already been

stored in the system’s database. 73, 365

“Destination

Assist”

Select to provide you with live assistance finding

destinations via the Lexus Enform with Safety

Connect response center.

80, 363

“Previous

Destinations”

Select a destination from any of the last 100 previ-

ously set destinations and from the previous start-

ing point.

“Del.Dest.” Select to delete set destinations. 86

3. QUICK REFERENCE

QUICK GUIDE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:23

“Address Book”

Select the desired location from a registered entry

in “Address book”. (To register address book en-

tries, see “REGISTERING ADDRESS BOOK

ENTRIES” on page 115.)

“Emergency”

Select one of the 4 categories of emergency ser-

vice points that have already been stored in the

system’s database.

“Intersection &

Freeway”

Select to enter the names of 2 intersecting streets

or a freeway (interstate) entrance or exit. This is

helpful if only the general vicinity, not the specific

address, is known.

“Map” Select to enable setting a destination by specifying

a location on the map screen. 85

“Coordinates” Select to enter latitude and longitude coordinates. 85

Preset destina-

tion buttons

Select one of the 5 preset destination points as a

destination. If a preset destination point has not

been registered, a message will be displayed ask-

ing if it is desirable to set a destination to the preset

screen button. (To register a preset destination,

see “REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS”

on page 112.)

“Go Home”

Select your personal home address without hav-

ing to enter the address each time. If a home ad-

dress has not been registered, a message will be

displayed and the setting screen will automatically

appear. (To register home, see “REGISTERING

HOME” on page 109.)

No. Name Function Page

3. QUICK REFERENCE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:23

3. “Setup” SCREEN

The items shown on the “Setup” screen can be set. Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup” to display the “Setup” screen.

3. QUICK REFERENCE

QUICK GUIDE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:23

No. Name Function Page

“General” Select to change the selected language, opera-

tion sound, automatic screen change settings, etc. 51

“Voice” Select to set the voice guidance settings. 62

“Navigation”

Select to set home, preset destinations, address

book, areas to avoid, etc. or to delete previous

destinations.

108

“Vehicle” Select to set vehicle information such as mainte-

nance information. 133

“Other” Select to set Lexus Insider, XM Sports, XM

Stocks and XM Fuel Prices. 344, 371

“Audio” Select to set iPod and HD Radio™ channel set-

tings. 288

“Bluetooth*” Select to set Bluetooth® phones and Bluetooth®

audio devices. 194

“Phone” Select to set the phone sound, phonebook, mes-

sage settings, etc. 172

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

3. QUICK REFERENCE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:23

4. “Information” SCREEN

This screen can be used to display the XM satellite system, fuel consumption, etc.

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Info/Apps” (“Info”) to

display the “Information” screen.

3. QUICK REFERENCE

QUICK GUIDE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:23

No. Name Function Page

“Apps” Select to display the “Apps” screen. 356, 359

“Fuel

Consumption” Select to display the fuel consumption screen. Owner’s

Manual

“Traffic Incidents” Select to display traffic incidents. 341

“Map Data” Select to display map data information. 322

“LEXUS Insider” Select to display the “LEXUS Insider” screen. 368

“XM

NavWeather” Select to display weather information. 337

“XM Stocks” Select to display personally selected stocks infor-

mation. 330

“XM Sports” Select to display personally selected sports teams

information. 327

“XM Fuel Prices” Select to display current fuel prices and gas sta-

tion locations information. 333

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:23

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.04.18 16:47

1. INITIAL SCREEN ....................................... 32

2. HOW TO USE THE Remote Touch...... 33

3. INPUTTING LETTERS AND

NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN

OPERATION............................................ 35

4. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT ........................ 38

SCREEN SETTINGS ADJUSTMENT ............. 38

5. MAP SCREEN OPERATION ............... 40

CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY..................... 40

SCREEN SCROLL OPERATION.................... 40

SWITCHING THE SCREENS............................ 45

MAP SCALE................................................................ 48

FOOT PRINT MAP .................................................. 48

ORIENTATION OF THE MAP........................... 49

STANDARD MAP ICONS .................................. 50

1. GENERAL SETTINGS............................... 51

SCREENS FOR GENERAL SETTINGS.......... 51

2. VOICE SETTINGS..................................... 62

SCREEN FOR VOICE SETTINGS ................... 62

1BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE

OPERATION

2SETUP

BASIC FUNCTION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

1. INITIAL SCREEN

1When the “START STOP ENGINE”

<“POWER”> switch is in ACCESSORY

or IGNITION ON <ON> mode, the ini-

tial screen will be displayed and the sys-

tem will begin operating.

-After a few seconds, the “CAUTION”

screen will be displayed.

-After about 5 seconds, the “CAUTION”

screen automatically switches to the map

screen. (If a button other than the “MAP/

VOICE” button on the Remote Touch is

pressed, the function’s corresponding

screen will be displayed.)

-Images shown on the initial screen can be

changed to suit individual preferences.

(See page 56.)

CAUTION

●When the vehicle is stopped with the

engine running <the hybrid system oper-

ating>, always apply the parking brake for

safety.

-When the navigation system is turned on

in a screen other than the map screen,

the “CAUTION” screen will be displayed

when the screen is changed to the map

screen for the first time after it has been

turned on.

MAINTENANCE

INFORMATION

This system reminds users when to re-

place certain parts or components and

shows dealer information (if registered)

on the screen.

When the vehicle reaches a previously

set driving distance or date specified for

a scheduled maintenance check, the

“Maintenance Reminder” screen will be

displayed when the navigation system is

turned on.

-This screen goes off if the screen is not

operated for several seconds.

-To prevent this screen from being dis-

played again, select “Do Not Display

This Message Again”.

-To register maintenance information, see

“MAINTENANCE” on page 133.

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

BASIC FUNCTION

2. HOW TO USE THE Remote Touch

1Use the Remote Touch knob to select

the desired button on the screen.

2To select the button on the screen, press

the Remote Touch knob. Once a button

has been selected, the screen will

change.

-When the pointer moves close to a button,

it will be automatically pulled onto that but-

ton. The strength of this pull can be

adjusted. (See page 60.)

-The pointer will disappear from the screen

if it is not moved for 6 seconds. Operation

of the Remote Touch knob will cause the

pointer to reappear.

-Press the “” button on the Remote Touch

to zoom in on the map screen and the “”

button to zoom out. These buttons can also

be used to scroll up and down on list

screens.

-Press the “MENU” button on the Remote

Touch to set a destination or adjust settings

for the audio/video system, air conditioning

system, etc.

-The map screen can be returned to by

pressing the “MAP/VOICE” button on the

Remote Touch.

This navigation system can be operated

by the Remote Touch when the “START

STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is

in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON

<ON> mode.

CAUTION

●Do not allow fingers, fingernails or hair to

become caught in the Remote Touch as

this may cause an injury.

●Be careful when touching the Remote

Touch in extreme temperatures as it may

become very hot or cold due to the tem-

perature inside the vehicle.

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NOTICE

●Do not allow the Remote Touch to come

into contact with food, liquid, stickers or lit

cigarettes as doing so may cause it to

change color, emit a strange odor or stop

functioning.

●Do not subject the Remote Touch to

excessive pressure or strong impact as

the knob may bend or break off.

●Do not allow coins, contact lenses or

other such items to become caught in the

Remote Touch as this may cause it to stop

functioning.

●Items of clothing may rip if they become

caught on the Remote Touch knob.

●If your hand or any object is on the

Remote Touch knob when the “START

STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is

turned to ACCESSORY mode, the

Remote Touch knob may not operate

properly.

INFORMATION

●Under extremely cold conditions, the

Remote Touch knob may react slowly.

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

BASIC FUNCTION

3. INPUTTING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION

1Select “A - Z ” to display the alphabet

keys.

2Select the keys directly to enter letters

or numbers.

: Select to erase one character. Select

and hold to continue erasing characters.

-On certain letter entry screens, letters can

be entered in upper or lower case.

1Select “Other” to display symbol keys.

2Select the symbol keys directly to enter

symbols.

: Select to erase one symbol. Select

and hold to continue erasing symbols.

When searching for an address or

name, or entering data, letters and num-

bers can be input via the screen.

-Keyboard layout can be changed. (See

page 55.)

TO INPUT LETTERS AND

NUMBERS

Icon Function

Select to enter in lower case.

Select to enter in upper case.

TO INPUT SYMBOLS

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Select “OK” to search for an address or

a name.

-Matching items from the database are

listed even if the entered address or name

is incomplete.

-The list will be displayed automatically if the

maximum number of characters is entered

or the number of matching items is 5 or

less.

TO DISPLAY THE LIST

INFORMATION

●The number of matching items is shown

on the right side of the screen. If the num-

ber of matching items is more than 999,

the system displays “” on the screen.

LIST SCREEN OPERATION

When a list is displayed, use the appro-

priate screen button to scroll through

the list.

Icon Function

Select to skip to the next or previ-

ous page.

Select and hold or to scroll

through the displayed list.

This indicates the displayed

screen’s position.

If appears to the right of an item

name, the complete name is too

long to display.

Select to scroll to the end of the

name.

Select to move to the beginning

of the name.

INFORMATION

●The “” and “” buttons on the Remote

Touch can be used to scroll up and down

on list screens.

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

BASIC FUNCTION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Select “Sort”.

2Select the desired sorting criteria.

SORTING

The order of a list displayed on the

screen can be rearranged.

Screen button Function

“Distance”

Select to sort in order of

distance from the current

position.

“Date” Select to sort in order of

date.

“Category” Select to sort in order of

category.

“Icon” Select to sort in order of

icon.

“Name” Select to sort in order of

name.

“Brand”

Select to sort in order of

brand name. (XM func-

tions)

“Price” Select to sort in order of

price. (XM functions)

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

4. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Display”.

Adjusting the screen display

“Camera”: Select to adjust the image the

camera displays.

Adjusting the image the camera displays

“Map·Menu”: Select to return to the

screen display settings.

1Select “” or “” to select the desired

function (“Contrast” or “Brightness”).

The contrast and brightness of the

screen display and the image the cam-

era displays can be adjusted. The display

can also be turned off, and/or changed

to either day or night mode. (For infor-

mation regarding audio/video screen

adjustment, see “AUDIO SCREEN

ADJUSTMENT” on page 244.)

SCREEN SETTINGS

ADJUSTMENT

ADJUSTING SCREEN

DISPLAY AND CAMERA

SETTINGS

CONTRAST AND

BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT

The contrast and brightness of the

screen can be adjusted according to the

brightness of your surroundings. The

display can also be turned off.

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

BASIC FUNCTION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

2Select the desired screen button to ad-

just contrast and brightness.

3After adjusting the screen, select “OK”.

-The screen goes off when “Screen Off” is

selected. To turn the screen back on, press

any button on the audio panel or on the

Remote Touch. The selected screen

appears.

1To display the screen in day mode, even

with the headlight switch on, select “Day

Mode” for brightness and contrast con-

trol.

-The displays condition is not changed to

night mode even if headlight switch is

turned on when the vehicle is in a bright

area, such as outside in direct sunlight.

Screen button Function

“Contrast” “+” Select to strengthen the

contrast of the screen.

“Contrast” “-” Select to weaken the

contrast of the screen.

“Brightness” “+” Select to brighten the

screen.

“Brightness” “-” Select to darken the

screen.

CHANGING BETWEEN DAY

AND NIGHT MODE

Depending on the position of the head-

light switch, the screen changes to day

or night mode.

INFORMATION

●If the screen is set to day mode with the

headlight switch turned on, this condition

is memorized even with the engine

<hybrid system> turned off.

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

5. MAP SCREEN OPERATION

-The current position mark ( ) appears in

the center or bottom center of the map

screen.

-A street name will appear on the bottom of

the screen, depending on the scale of the

map ( ).

-The screen can be returned to this map

screen that shows the current position at

any time, from any screen by pressing the

“MAP/VOICE” button on the Remote

Touch.

-Use the scroll feature to move the desired

point to the center of the screen for looking

at a point on the map that is different from

the current position.

-To scroll over the map, place the pointer in

a position near the desired destination and

then press and hold the Remote Touch

knob. The map will continue scrolling in that

direction until the knob is released.

-A street name, city name, etc. of the

selected point will be shown, depending on

the scale of the map ( ). Distance from

the current position to will also be

shown ( ).

CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY

When starting the navigation system,

the current position is displayed first.

This screen displays the current position

and a map of the surrounding area.

-To correct the current position manually,

see page 130.

INFORMATION

●While driving, the current position mark

is fixed on the screen and the map moves.

●The current position is automatically set

as the vehicle receives signals from the

GPS (Global Positioning System). If the

current position is not correct, it is auto-

matically corrected after the vehicle

receives signals from the GPS.

INFORMATION

●After 12-volt battery disconnection, or on

a new vehicle, the current position may

not be correct. As soon as the system

receives signals from the GPS, the cor-

rect current position is displayed.

SCREEN SCROLL

OPERATION

When any point on the map is selected,

that point moves to the center of the

screen and is shown by the cursor mark

().

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

BASIC FUNCTION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Select “Enter ”.

-The screen changes and displays the map

location of the selected destination and the

route preference. (See “STARTING

ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 87.)

1Select “Mark”.

2This screen is displayed.

-The registered point is shown by on the

map.

-After the screen is scrolled, the map

remains centered at the selected location

until another function is activated. The

current position mark will continue to

move along your actual route and may

move off the screen. When the “MAP/

VOICE” button on the Remote Touch is

pressed, the current position mark

returns to the center of the screen and

the map moves as the vehicle proceeds

along the designated route.

-When the scroll feature is used, the cur-

rent position mark may disappear from

the screen. Press the “MAP/VOICE”

button on the Remote Touch to display

the current position on the map screen.

TO SET THE CURSOR

POSITION AS A DESTINATION

A specific point on the map can be set as

a destination using the scroll function.

TO REGISTER THE CURSOR

POSITION AS AN ADDRESS

BOOK ENTRY

Address book entry registration enables

easy access to a specific point.

-To change the icon or name, etc., see

“EDITING ADDRESS BOOK

ENTRIES” on page 115.

INFORMATION

●Up to 100 address book entries can be

registered. If there is an attempt to regis-

ter more than 100 address book entries,

an error message will appear.

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

-To display information about an icon, set

the cursor on it.

■POI INFORMATION

1Select “Info”.

2Information such as the name, address,

position and phone number are dis-

played.

TO SEE INFORMATION

ABOUT THE ICON WHERE

THE CURSOR IS SET

When the cursor is set on a POI icon, the

name and “Info” are displayed at the top

of the screen.

-If “Enter ” is selected, the cursor posi-

tion will be set as a destination.

-If a destination has already been set, “Go

Directly” and “Add to Route” will be dis-

played.

“Go Directly”: Select to delete the exist-

ing destination(s) and set a new one.

“Add to Route”: Select to add a destina-

tion.

-To register this POI as an address book

entry, select “Mark”. (See “REGISTER-

ING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES” on

page 115.)

-If is selected, the registered

phone number can be called.

-The desired POI can be displayed on the

map screen. (See “DISPLAY POI

ICONS” on page 104.)

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

BASIC FUNCTION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

■ADDRESS BOOK ENTRY INFOR-

MATION

1Select “Info”.

2Information such as the name, address,

position and phone number are dis-

played.

When the cursor is set on an address

book entry icon, the name and “Info” are

displayed at the top of the screen.

-If “Enter ” is selected, the cursor posi-

tion will be set as a destination.

-If a destination has already been set, “Go

Directly” and “Add to Route” will be dis-

played.

“Go Directly”: Select to delete the exist-

ing destination(s) and set a new one.

“Add to Route”: Select to add a destina-

tion.

-To edit an address book entry, select

“Edit”. (See “EDITING ADDRESS

BOOK ENTRIES” on page 115.)

-To delete an address book entry, select

“Delete”.

-If is selected, the registered

phone number can be called.

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

■DESTINATION INFORMATION

1Select “Info”.

2Information such as the name, address,

position and phone number are dis-

played.

-To delete a destination, select “Delete”.

■XM NavTraffic® TEXT INFORMA-

TION

1Select “Info”.

2Traffic information will be displayed on

the screen.

-To display detailed traffic event information,

select “Detail”.

When the cursor is set on a destination

icon, the name and “Info” are displayed

on the top of the screen.

-If is selected, the registered

phone number can be called.

When the XM NavTraffic® icon on the

map screen is selected, the XM

NavTraffic® information bar will appear

on the upper part of the screen.

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

BASIC FUNCTION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Select “Map Mode”.

2Select the screen buttons to select the

desired configuration.

-Depending on the conditions, certain

screen configuration buttons cannot be

selected.

SWITCHING THE SCREENS

Any of the screen configurations can be

selected.

Screen button Function

“Map Only”

Select to display the single

map screen. (See page

46.)

“Turn List” Select to display the turn

list screen. (See page 92.)

“Intersection”

Select to display the inter-

section guidance screen

or the guidance screen on

the freeway. (See page

91.)

“A u d i o ” Select to display the audio

screen. (See page 46.)

“Fuel Con-

sumption”

Select to display the fuel

consumption screen. (See

page 46.)

“Other

Information”

Select to display the fol-

lowing 4 screen configu-

rations: “Dual map”,

“Compass”, “Turn-by-

Turn Arrow” and “Freeway

Exit List”.

“Dual map”

Select to display the dual

map screen. (See page

46.)

“Compass”

Select to display the com-

pass mode screen. (See

page 47.)

“Turn-by-

Tu r n A rr o w ”

Select to display the turn-

by-turn arrow screen. (See

page 92.)

“Freeway

Exit List”

Select to display the free-

way exit list screen. (See

page 90.)

Screen button Function

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

■MAP ONLY

-The screen shows the single map.

■AUDIO

-Information on the current radio station or

track is displayed.

■FUEL CONSUMPTION

-Selecting “” or “” allows selection of the

desired mode (“Energy Monitor”*, “Trip

Information” or “Past Record”).

*: Hybrid vehicle

■DUAL MAP

-This screen shows the dual map. The map

on the left is the main map.

SCREEN CONFIGURATIONS

This is a regular map screen.

-While on a different screen, selecting

“Map Only” will display the single map

screen.

The audio screen and the map screen

are displayed.

-If a different screen is displayed, select

“A u d i o ” on the “Map Mode” screen.

-For audio system operation, refer to

“AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERA-

TION”. (See page 208.)

The fuel consumption screen and the

map screen are displayed.

-If a different screen is displayed, select

“Fuel Consumption” on the “Map

Mode” screen.

-For an explanation on each fuel con-

sumption mode, refer to “FUEL CON-

SUMPTION”. For details, refer to

“Owner’s Manual”.

The map screen can be split into two.

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

BASIC FUNCTION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

■EDITING RIGHT MAP

1Select the desired screen button.

-The following procedures can be per-

formed on this screen:

2Select “OK” when editing is completed.

-The screen returns to the dual map screen.

■COMPASS

-Information about the destination, current

position and a compass is displayed on the

screen.

-While on a different screen, selecting

“Dual map” will display the dual map

screen.

The right side map can be edited by se-

lecting any point on the right side map.

No. Function

Changing the orientation of the map

Displaying POI icons

Showing XM NavTraffic®

information (See page 342.)

Displaying eDestination icons (See

page 367.)

Changing the map scale

The current position is indicated with a

compass.

-While on a different screen, selecting

“Compass” will display the compass

mode screen.

INFORMATION

●The destination mark is displayed in the

direction of the destination. When driv-

ing, refer to the longitude and latitude

coordinates, and the compass, to make

sure that the vehicle is headed in the

direction of the destination.

●When the vehicle travels out of the cover-

age area, the guidance screen changes to

the compass mode screen.

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Select or to change the scale

of the map screen.

-The scale bar and indicator at the bottom of

the screen indicate the map scale menu.

The scale range is from 150 ft. (50 m) to

250 miles (400 km).

-Select and hold or to continue

changing the scale of the map screen.

-The scale of the map screen can be

changed by selecting the scale bar directly.

This function is not available while driving.

1To display the foot print map, select

-To delete the foot print map display, select

MAP SCALE

INFORMATION

●Press the “” button on the Remote

Touch to zoom in on the map screen and

the “” button to zoom out.

●The map scale is displayed under the

north-up or heading-up symbol at the top

left of the screen.

●When the map scale is at the maximum

range of 250 miles (400 km), is not

shown. When the map scale is at the min-

imum range of 150 ft. (50 m), is not

shown. In areas where the foot print map

is available the map scale changes from

to when at the minimum

range.

FOOT PRINT MAP

For the area which is covered by the foot

print map (Some areas in the following

cities: Detroit, Chicago, N.Y., L.A), you

can switch to the foot print map on a

scale of 75 ft. (25 m).

TO SWITCH TO THE FOOT

PRINT MAP

changes into when the map is

scaled down to 150 ft. (50 m).

INFORMATION

●If the map or the current position is

moved to the area which is not covered

by the foot print map, the screen scale

automatically changes to 150 ft. (50 m).

●On the foot print map, a one way street is

displayed by .

●It is not possible to perform scrolling on

the foot print map while driving.

Building footprints in the database were

created and provided by

MAPMASTER.

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

BASIC FUNCTION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Select “Info” while the foot print map is

displayed.

-Details of POIs in some buildings may be

displayed.

-For detailed POI information, select the

building name. You can see details of the

selected POIs.

1Select or .

North-up screen

Heading-up screen

: North-up symbol

Regardless of the direction of vehicle travel,

north is always up.

: Heading-up symbol

The direction of vehicle travel is always up.

TO DISPLAY BUILDING

INFORMATION

Information is available only for build-

ings for which information is recorded

on the map data.

ORIENTATION OF THE MAP

The orientation of the map can be

changed from north-up to heading-up

by selecting the orientation symbol at

the top left of the screen.

-Both the north-up and heading-up sym-

bols display the vehicles direction as a

letter (e.g. N for north).

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

STANDARD MAP ICONS

Icon Name

Island

Park

Industry

Business facility

Airport

Military

University

Hospital

Stadium

Shopping mall

Golf

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

BASIC FUNCTION

2. SETUP

1. GENERAL SETTINGS

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Setup”.

3Select “General”.

4Select the items to be set.

5Select “Save”.

-On this screen, the following functions can

be performed:

Used for language selection and the on/

off settings of operation sounds and au-

tomatic screen change, etc.

SCREENS FOR GENERAL

SETTINGS

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

No. Function

Select to change the time zone and

select “On” or “Off” for daylight sav-

ing time. (See “SYSTEM TIME SET-

TINGS” on page 53.)

Select to change the language. (See

“SELECTING A LANGUAGE” on

page 54.)

Select to change the distance unit.

(See “UNIT OF MEASUREMENT”

on page 54.)

Select to change the screen button

color. (See “SELECTING A BUT-

TON COLOR” on page 55.)

Select to change the keyboard layout.

(See “SELECTING A KEYBOARD

LAYOUT” on page 55.)

Select to customize the startup im-

age. (See “CHANGING THE

STARTUP IMAGE” on page 56.)

Select to customize the screen off im-

age. (See “CHANGING THE

SCREEN OFF IMAGE” on page

58.)

Select to set automatic screen chang-

es from the audio/air conditioning

control screen to the previous screen

to “On” or “Off”. If “On” is selected,

the screen will automatically return to

the previous screen from the audio/

air conditioning control screen after

20 seconds.

Select to turn the selection sounds

“On” or “Off”.

Select to turn the pointer sounds

“On” or “Off”.

Select to turn the error sounds “On”

or “Off”.

Select to adjust the pointer sound vol-

ume. (See “POINTER SOUND

VOLUME SETTINGS” on page 60.)

Select to adjust the strength of the

pull from the buttons to the pointer.

(See “SETTING A FEEDBACK

FORCE” on page 60.)

Select to delete personal data. (See

“DELETING PERSONAL DATA”

on page 61.)

Select to update program versions.

For details, contact your Lexus deal-

er.

Select to update gracenote database

versions. For details, contact your

Lexus dealer.

No. Function

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

BASIC FUNCTION

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select “System Time”.

4Select the items to be set.

-On this screen, the following functions can

be performed:

5Select “Save”.

■TIME ZONE

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select “System Time” on the

“General Settings” screen.

4Select “Time Zone”.

5Select the desired time zone.

-If “Other” is selected, the zone can be

adjusted manually. Select “+” or “-” to

adjust the time zone and then select “OK”.

6Select “Save”.

SYSTEM TIME SETTINGS

Used for changing time zones and the

on/off settings of daylight saving time.

No. Function

Select to change the time zone. (See

“TIME ZONE” on page 53.)

To select “On” or “Off” for daylight

saving time.

A time zone can be selected and GMT

can be set.

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select “Language”.

4Select the desired screen button.

5Select “Yes”.

-The previous screen will be displayed.

6Select “Save”.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select “Unit of Measurement”.

4Select “km” or “mile”.

-The previous screen will be displayed.

5Select “Save”.

SELECTING A LANGUAGE

The language can be changed.

UNIT OF MEASUREMENT

Distance unit can be changed.

-This function is available only in English

or Spanish. To change language, see

“SELECTING A LANGUAGE” on page

54.

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

BASIC FUNCTION

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select “Button Color”.

4Select the desired screen button color.

-The previous screen will be displayed.

5Select “Save”.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select “Keyboard Layout”.

4Select “ABC” or “QWERTY” of “Key-

board Layout” to change the keyboard

layout.

-The previous screen will be displayed.

5Select “Save”.

SELECTING A BUTTON

COLOR

The color of the screen buttons can be

changed.

SELECTING A KEYBOARD

LAYOUT

Keyboard layout can be changed.

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

■LAYOUT TYPE

“ABC” type

“QWERTY” type

CHANGING THE STARTUP

IMAGE

When the “START STOP ENGINE”

<“POWER”> switch is in ACCESSORY

or IGNITION ON <ON> mode, the ini-

tial screen will be displayed.

An image can be copied from a USB

memory and used as the startup image.

(For information regarding the startup

image, see “INITIAL SCREEN” on page

32.)

INFORMATION

●When saving the images to a USB, name

the folder that the startup image is saved

to “StartupImage” and name the folder

that the screen off image is saved to

“DisplayOffImage”. If these folder names

are not used, the navigation system can-

not download the images. (The folder

names are case sensitive.)

●The images file extension is JPG or

JPEG.

●The images file name, including the file

extension, can be up to 32 characters.

●Image files of 10 MB or less can be saved.

●Up to 3 images can be downloaded.

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

BASIC FUNCTION

■TRANSFERRING DATA

1Grip the knob to release the lock, and

lift the armrest to open.

2Open the cover and connect a USB

memory.

-Turn on the power of the USB memory if it

is not turned on.

3Close the console box.

4Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

5Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.

6Select “Customize Startup Image”.

7Select “Transfer”.

8Select “Yes”.

■SETTING THE STARTUP IMAGE

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select “Customize Startup Image” on

the “General Settings” screen.

4Select the desired image.

5Select “Save”.

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

■DELETING TRANSFERRED IMAG-

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select “Customize Startup Image” on

the “General Settings” screen.

4Select “Delete All”.

5Select “Yes”.

■TRANSFERRING DATA

1Grip the knob to release the lock, and

lift the armrest to open.

2Open the cover and connect a USB

memory.

-Turn on the power of the USB memory if it

is not turned on.

CHANGING THE SCREEN

OFF IMAGE

Select “Screen Off” to turn off the

screen. An image can be copied from a

USB memory and can be set to display

when “Screen Off” is selected. (For

more information on “Screen Off”, see

“SCREEN ADJUSTMENT” on page

38.)

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

BASIC FUNCTION

3Close the console box.

4Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

5Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.

6Select “Customize Screen Off Image”.

7Select “Transfer”.

8Select “Yes”.

■SETTING THE SCREEN OFF IM-

AGE

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select “Customize Screen Off Image”

on the “General Settings” screen.

4Select the desired image.

5Select “Save”.

■DELETING TRANSFERRED IMAG-

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select “Customize Screen Off Image”

on the “General Settings” screen.

4Select “Delete All”.

5Select “Yes”.

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select “Pointer Sound Volume”.

4Select the desired button.

5Select “OK”.

6Select “Save”.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select “Feedback Force”.

4Select “+” or “-”.

5Select “OK”.

6Select “Save”.

POINTER SOUND VOLUME

SETTINGS

The pointer sound volume can be ad-

justed.

SETTING A FEEDBACK

FORCE

When the pointer moves close to a but-

ton, it will be automatically pulled onto

that button. The strength of this pull can

be adjusted.

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

BASIC FUNCTION

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select “Delete Personal Data”.

4Select “Delete”.

5Select “Yes”.

-The following personal data can be deleted

or returned to their default settings:

• Maintenance conditions

• Maintenance information off setting

• Address book

•Areas to avoid

•Previous points

•Route guidance

• Route trace

• Phonebook data

•Call history data

• Speed dial data

•Bluetooth

® phone data

• Phone sound settings

• Phone display settings

• Message settings

•Audio setting

•Bluetooth

® audio setting

• Startup image data

•Screen off image data

• Downloaded Apps

DELETING PERSONAL DATA

INFORMATION

●This function is not available while driving.

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

2. VOICE SETTINGS

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Setup”.

3Select “Voice”.

4Select the items to be set.

5Select “Save”.

-On this screen, the following functions can

be performed:

Voice guidance etc. can be set.

SCREEN FOR VOICE

SETTINGS

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

BASIC FUNCTION

-To reset all setup items, select “Default”.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Voice” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select the desired level by selecting the

appropriate number.

-If voice guidance is not needed, select

“Off” to disable the feature.

4Select “Save”.

No. Function

The voice guidance volume can be

adjusted or switched off. (See

“VOICE VOLUME” on page 63.)

Voice guidance during route guid-

ance can be set to “On” or “Off”.

Voice guidance during audio/video

and/or air conditioning system use

can be set to “On” or “Off”.

Voice recognition prompts can be

set to “On” or “Off”. This setting can

also be changed on the “Shortcut

Menu” screen. (See page 308.)

When “On” is selected, the audio/

video and air conditioning systems

can be operated using voice com-

mands.

When using the traffic information

function, voice guidance can be set to

“On” or “Off”. (See “TRAFFIC INCI-

DENT WARNING” on page 64.)

When using the XM NavWeather™

function, the severe weather warning

can be set to “On” or “Off”.

VOICE VOLUME

The voice guidance volume can be ad-

justed or switched off.

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Voice” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select “On” of “Traffic Incident Warn-

ing”.

4Select “Save”.

TRAFFIC INCIDENT

WARNING

Traffic congestion information can be

received via voice guidance while being

guided to the desired destination.

INFORMATION

●When the “Traffic Information” indicator

is dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic Incident

Warning” and “Show Free Flowing Traffic”

will not operate. (See page 342.)

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

BASIC FUNCTION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.04.18 16:48

1. DESTINATION SEARCH....................... 68

SELECTING THE SEARCH AREA ................. 68

DESTINATION SEARCH BY HOME............. 69

DESTINATION SEARCH BY PRESET

DESTINATIONS..................................................... 69

DESTINATION SEARCH

BY “Address” ............................................................ 70

DESTINATION SEARCH

BY “Point of Interest” ............................................. 73

DESTINATION SEARCH

BY “Destination Assist”........................................ 80

DESTINATION SEARCH

BY “Previous Destinations”................................ 80

DESTINATION SEARCH

BY “Address Book” ................................................. 81

DESTINATION SEARCH

BY “Emergency” ....................................................... 81

DESTINATION SEARCH

BY “Intersection & Freeway”............................. 82

DESTINATION SEARCH

BY “Map” ................................................................... 85

DESTINATION SEARCH

BY “Coordinates”................................................... 85

DELETING SET DESTINATIONS.................... 86

2. STARTING ROUTE

GUIDANCE .............................................. 87

1DESTINATION SEARCH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.04.18 16:48

1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN............ 90

2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE

PROMPTS ................................................. 93

3. DISTANCE AND TIME TO

DESTINATION ........................................ 96

4. SETTING AND DELETING

DESTINATIONS...................................... 97

ADDING DESTINATIONS .................................. 97

REORDERING DESTINATIONS...................... 97

DELETING DESTINATIONS ............................. 98

5. SETTING ROUTE ...................................... 99

DETOUR SETTING .................................................. 99

ROUTE OVERVIEW ............................................ 100

ROUTE PREFERENCE.......................................... 101

PAUSING AND RESUMING

GUIDANCE ........................................................... 103

SHOW ON MAP..................................................... 104

ROUTE TRACE ........................................................ 107

1. NAVIGATION SETTINGS ................... 108

SETTING UP THE “Home”.................................. 109

SETTING UP THE “Preset Destinations”.......... 111

SETTING UP THE “Address Book” .................. 114

SETTING UP THE “Areas to Avoid”................. 119

DELETING PREVIOUS

DESTINATIONS................................................... 124

1. DETAILED NAVIGATION

SETTINGS................................................ 125

SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION

SETTINGS................................................................ 125

2. VEHICLE SETTINGS .............................. 133

MAINTENANCE..................................................... 133

VEHICLE CUSTOMIZATION......................... 138

1. LIMITATIONS OF THE

NAVIGATION SYSTEM.................... 139

2ROUTE GUIDANCE 3ADDRESS BOOK

4SETUP

5GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING

SYSTEM)

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Destination”.

3This screen is displayed.

-One of 11 different methods can be used to

search a destination. (See pages 69

through 85.)

1Select “Change State/Province” to dis-

play a list of the states/provinces/terri-

tories of the United States and Canada.

2Select the desired state (province).

-The previous screen will be displayed.

INFORMATION

●When searching a destination, the

response to the screen button may be

slow.

SELECTING THE SEARCH

AREA

The selected state (province) can be

changed to set a destination from a dif-

ferent state (province) by using “A d -

dress”, “Point of Interest” or

“Intersection & Freeway”.

-For map database information and

updates, see “MAP DATABASE VER-

SION AND COVERAGE AREA” on

page 322.

-If a state (province) has not been

selected yet, “Select State/Province” is

displayed.

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Destination” on the “Menu”

screen.

3Select “Go Home”.

-Yo u r h o m e a d d r e s s i s set as the destination.

The navigation system performs a search

for the route.

4Select “OK”.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Destination” on the “Menu”

screen.

3Select any of the preset destination but-

tons (1-5).

-The selected preset destination point is set

as the destination. The navigation system

performs a search for the route. (See

“STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on

page 87.)

4Select “OK”.

DESTINATION SEARCH BY

HOME

-To use this function, it is necessary to set a

home address. (To register home, see

page 109.)

INFORMATION

●If a home address has not been regis-

tered, a message confirming if it is desir-

able to set a home will be displayed, and

the setting screen will appear.

●Guidance starts from the current position

to the set home address if “OK” is

selected even while driving.

DESTINATION SEARCH BY

PRESET DESTINATIONS

-To use this function, it is necessary to set

preset destinations to the preset screen

buttons (1-5). (See “REGISTERING

PRESET DESTINATIONS” on page 112.)

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Destination” on the “Menu”

screen.

3Select “Address” on the “Destination”

screen.

4Select the desired search method.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select

“Destination”.

2Select “Address” on the “Destination”

screen.

3Select “City”.

4Input a city name.

5Select the screen button of the desired

city name from the displayed list.

INFORMATION

●If a preset destination point has not been

registered, a message confirming if it is

desirable to set a preset destination will

be displayed, and the setting screen will

appear.

●Guidance starts from the current position

to the preset destination point if “OK” is

selected even while driving.

DESTINATION SEARCH BY

“Address”

There are 2 methods to search a desti-

nation by address:

(a) Search by city

(b) Search by street address

SELECTING A CITY TO

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

6Input the street name and select “OK”.

7When the desired street name is found,

select the corresponding screen button.

-When the desired street name is selected,

the “Confirm Destination” screen may be

displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Con-

firm Destination” screen, the navigation

system performs a search for the route.

(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”

on page 87.)

8Input a house number.

-If the same address exists in more than 1

city, the current screen changes to the

address list screen.

■SEARCHING FROM THE LAST 5

CITIES

1Select “Last 5 Cities”.

2Select the screen button of the desired

city name from the displayed list.

-The current screen changes to the

screen for inputting a street name. (See

“SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH” on

page 70.)

INFORMATION

●If the navigation system has never been

used, this function will not be available.

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select

“Destination”.

2Select “Address” on the “Destination”

screen.

3Select “Street Address”.

4Select numbers directly on the screen to

input the house number.

-After inputting the house number, select

“OK” to display the screen for inputting the

street name.

5Input the street name and select “OK”.

6When the desired street name is found,

select the corresponding screen button.

-When the desired street name is selected,

the “Confirm Destination” screen may be

displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Con-

firm Destination” screen, the navigation

system performs a search for the route.

(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”

on page 87.)

-If the same address exists in more than 1

city, a screen requesting the city name to be

input or selected will be displayed.

7Input a city name.

8Select the screen button of the desired

city name from the displayed list.

SEARCH BY STREET ADDRESS

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Destination” on the “Menu”

screen.

3Select “Point of Interest” on the “Desti-

nation” screen.

4Select the desired search method.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select

“Destination”.

2Select “Point of Interest” on the “Desti-

nation” screen.

3Select “Name” on the “Point of Interest”

screen.

4Input the name of the POI.

5Select the screen button of the desired

destination.

-When the desired destination is selected,

the “Confirm Destination” screen may be

displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Con-

firm Destination” screen, the navigation

system performs a search for the route.

(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”

on page 87.)

-When inputting the name of a specific POI,

and there are 2 or more sites with the same

name, the list screen is displayed.

INFORMATION

●A street name can be searched using

only the body part of its name.

●For example: S WESTERN AVE

• A search can be performed by inputting

“S WESTERN AVE”, “WESTERN AVE”

or “WESTERN”.

DESTINATION SEARCH BY

“Point of Interest”

There are 4 methods to search a desti-

nation by Points of Interest:

(a) Search by name

(b) Search by category

(d) Search by eDestination

SEARCH BY “Name”

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

6Select the screen button of the desired

destination.

-If the same name exists in more than 1 city, a

search can be performed more easily using

“City” or “Category”. (See “SELECTING

A CITY TO SEARCH” on page 74 and

“SELECTING FROM THE CATEGO-

RIES” on page 75.)

■SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH

1Select “City”.

2Input the city name.

-To cancel the city setting, select “A n y C i t y ” .

3Select the screen button of the desired

city name from the displayed list.

-The desired POI can be displayed on the

map screen. (See “DISPLAY POI

ICONS” on page 104.)

INFORMATION

●To search for a facility name using multi-

ple search words, put a space between

each word.

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

■SELECTING FROM THE CATEGO-

RIES

1Select “Category”.

2Select the screen button of the desired

category.

-If the desired POI category is on the

screen, select its screen button to display a

detailed list of the POI category.

-If the desired POI category is not on the

screen, select “List All Categories” to list

all POI categories.

-When the desired category is selected, the

POI name list screen is displayed.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select

“Destination”.

2Select “Point of Interest” on the “Desti-

nation” screen.

3Select “Category”.

4This screen is displayed.

SEARCH BY “Category”

The destination can be set by selecting

the search point and the POI category.

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

-On this screen, the following operations

can be performed:

■SETTING THE SEARCH POINT

FROM NEAR HERE

1Select “Near Here”.

-The search point is set at the current posi-

tion, and the “POI Category” screen will be

displayed. (See page 78.)

■SETTING THE SEARCH POINT

FROM ALONG MY ROUTE

1Select “A l o n g M y R o u t e ” .

-The search point is set and the “POI Cate-

gory” screen will be displayed. (See page

78.)

■SETTING THE SEARCH POINT

FROM NEAR CITY CENTER

1Select “Near a City Center in XX*”.

2Input the city center name.

3Select the screen button of the desired

city center name.

-The search point is set and the “POI Cate-

gory” screen will be displayed. (See page

78.)

*: XX represents the selected search area

name.

No. Function

Select to set the search point from

near the current position.

Select to set the search point from

along the selected route.

Select to set the search point from

near a city center.

Select to set the search point from

near a destination.

INFORMATION

●The names of POIs located within

approximately 200 miles (320 km) from

the selected search point can be dis-

played.

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

■SELECTING FROM THE LAST 5

CITIES

1Select “Near a City Center in XX*”.

2Select “Last 5 Cities”.

3Select the screen button of the desired

city center name.

-The search point is set and the “POI Cate-

gory” screen will be displayed. (See page

78.)

*: XX represents the selected search area

name.

■SETTING THE SEARCH POINT

FROM NEAR A DESTINATION

1Select “Near a Destination”.

2Select the screen button of the desired

destination.

-The search point is set and the “POI Cate-

gory” screen will be displayed. (See page

78.)

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

■TO SEARCH FOR POIs NEAR THE

SEARCH POINT

1Select the desired POI category.

-If the desired POI category is not on the

screen, select “List All Categories” to list

all POI categories.

-If “Favorite POI Categories” is selected, a

search can be performed using the 6 POIs

that have been previously set. For more

details, see “POI CATEGORY CHANGE

(SELECT POI ICONS)” on page 129.

2Select the desired POI category from

the list.

3Select the screen button of the desired

item.

-When the desired item is selected, the

“Confirm Destination” screen may be dis-

played. If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm

Destination” screen, the navigation system

performs a search for the route. (See

“STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on

page 87.)

When the search point is set, the “POI

Category” screen will be displayed.

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select

“Destination”.

2Select “Point of Interest” on the “Desti-

nation” screen.

3Select “Phone #” on the “Point of Inter-

est” screen.

4Input a phone number.

5After inputting a phone number, select

“OK”.

-When a phone number is input, the “Con-

firm Destination” screen may be displayed.

If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm Desti-

nation” screen, the navigation system per-

forms a search for the route. (See

“STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on

page 87.)

-If there is more than 1 site with the same

number, the following screen will be dis-

played.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select

“Destination”.

2Select “Point of Interest” on the “Desti-

nation” screen.

3Select “eDestination” on the “Point of

Interest” screen.

-With the eDestination feature, you can go

online, via the Lexus.com owner’s Web site,

to select and organize destinations of your

choice and then wirelessly send them to

your vehicle’s navigation system. Up to

200 locations can be stored online and

accessed or updated at any time. Locations

can be organized into up to 20 folders.

(See “eDestination” on page 365.)

SEARCH BY “Phone #” -To set an address book entry as a desti-

nation using the phone number, the num-

ber must already be registered with the

address book entry. (See page 118.)

INFORMATION

●If there is no match for the phone number

input, a list of identical numbers with dif-

ferent area codes will be displayed.

SEARCH BY “eDestination”

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Destination” on the “Menu”

screen.

3Select “Destination Assist” on the

“Destination” screen.

-Destination Assist provides you with live

assistance for finding destinations via the

Lexus Enform with Safety Connect

response center. You can request either a

specific business, address, or ask for help

locating your desired destination by cate-

gory, such as restaurants, gas stations,

shopping centers or other points of interest

(POI). After you tell the agent your choice

of destination, its coordinates are sent wire-

lessly to your vehicle’s navigation system.

(See “Destination Assist” on page 363.)

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Destination” on the “Menu”

screen.

3Select “Previous Destinations” on the

“Destination” screen.

4Select the screen button of the desired

destination.

-The previous starting point and up to 100

previously set destinations are displayed on

the screen.

“Delete”: Select to delete the previous des-

tination. (To delete previous destinations,

see page 86.)

-When the desired destination is selected,

the “Confirm Destination” screen may be

displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Con-

firm Destination” screen, the navigation

system performs a search for the route.

(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”

on page 87.)

DESTINATION SEARCH BY

“Destination Assist”

DESTINATION SEARCH BY

“Previous Destinations”

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Destination” on the “Menu”

screen.

3Select “Address Book” on the “Destina-

tion” screen.

4Select the screen button of the desired

address book entry.

-A list of registered address book entries is

displayed.

“Options”: Select to register or edit address

book entries. (See page 115.)

-When the desired address book entry is

selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen

may be displayed. If “Go” is selected on the

“Confirm Destination” screen, the naviga-

tion system performs a search for the route.

(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”

on page 87.)

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Destination” on the “Menu”

screen.

3Select “Emergency” on the second

page of the “Destination” screen.

-The display changes to a screen to select

police stations, dealers, hospitals or fire sta-

tions.

4Select the desired emergency category.

-The selected emergency category is dis-

played.

-The list of previous destinations can also

be deleted by selecting “Delete Previ-

ous Dest.” on the “Navigation Settings”

screen when the vehicle is stopped. (See

“DELETING PREVIOUS DESTINA-

TIONS” on page 124.)

DESTINATION SEARCH BY

“Address Book”

DESTINATION SEARCH BY

“Emergency”

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

5Select the screen button of the desired

destination.

-When the desired destination is selected,

the “Confirm Destination” screen may be

displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Con-

firm Destination” screen, the navigation

system performs a search for the route.

(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”

on page 87.)

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Destination” on the “Menu”

screen.

3Select “Intersection & Freeway” on the

second page of the “Destination”

screen.

4Select the desired method.

INFORMATION

●The navigation system does not guide in

areas where route guidance is unavail-

able. (See page 140.)

●The emergency function can be used

even while driving.

●While driving, only the currently dis-

played items and the items on the next

page can be viewed.

DESTINATION SEARCH BY

“Intersection & Freeway”

There are 2 methods to search a desti-

nation by Intersection & Freeway:

(a) Search by intersection

(b) Search by freeway

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select

“Destination”.

2Select “Intersection & Freeway” on the

second page of the “Destination”

screen.

3Select “Intersection” on the “Intersec-

tion & Freeway” screen.

4Input the name of the first intersecting

street which is located near the destina-

tion to be set, and select “OK”.

5Select the screen button of the desired

item.

6Input the name of the second intersect-

ing street.

7Select the screen button of the desired

item.

-When the desired item is selected, the

“Confirm Destination” screen may be dis-

played. If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm

Destination” screen, the navigation system

performs a search for the route. (See

“STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on

page 87.)

SEARCH BY “Intersection”

INFORMATION

●If the same 2 streets cross at more than 1

intersection, the screen changes and dis-

plays the menu to select the city name

where the streets intersect. Select the

city, and the map location of the selected

destination and the route preference.

(See “STARTING ROUTE GUID-

ANCE” on page 87.)

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select

“Destination”.

2Select “Intersection & Freeway” on the

second page of the “Destination”

screen.

3Select “Freeway Entrance / Exit” on

the “Intersection & Freeway” screen.

4Input a freeway name.

5Select the screen button of the desired

freeway.

6Select “Entrance” or “Exit”.

7Input a freeway entrance or exit name,

and select “OK”.

8Select the screen button of the desired

entrance or exit name.

-When the desired entrance or exit is

selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen

may be displayed. If “Go” is selected on the

“Confirm Destination” screen, the naviga-

tion system performs a search for the route.

(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”

on page 87.)

SEARCH BY “Freeway

Entrance / Exit”

INFORMATION

●Be sure to use the complete name of the

freeway or highway, including the

hyphen, when entering the destination.

Freeways and interstates use an “I”

(I-405). US highways use the state desig-

nation before the number (CA-118).

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Destination” on the “Menu”

screen.

3Select “Map” on the second page of the

“Destination” screen.

4Scroll the map to the desired point.

5Select “Go to ”.

-The navigation system performs a search

for the route. (See “STARTING ROUTE

GUIDANCE” on page 87.)

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Destination” on the “Menu”

screen.

3Select “Coordinates” on the second

page of the “Destination” screen.

4Input the latitude and the longitude.

5After inputting the latitude and longi-

tude, select “OK”.

-When the desired screen button is

selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen

may be displayed. If “Go” is selected on the

“Confirm Destination” screen, the naviga-

tion system performs a search for the route.

(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”

on page 87.)

DESTINATION SEARCH BY

“Map”

INFORMATION

●Guidance starts if “OK” is selected even

while driving. However, the cursor cannot

be moved.

DESTINATION SEARCH BY

“Coordinates”

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Destination” on the “Menu”

screen.

3Select “Del.Dest.” on the “Destination”

screen.

-When more than 1 destination is set, a list

will be displayed on the screen.

4Select the destination to be deleted.

“Delete All”: Select to delete all destina-

tions on the list.

5Select “Yes” to delete the destination(s).

-A message appears to confirm the request

to delete.

-If “Yes” is selected, the data cannot be

recovered. If more than 1 destination has

been set, the system will recalculate the

route(s) to the set destination(s) as neces-

sary.

-If “No” is selected, the previous screen will

be displayed.

DELETING SET

DESTINATIONS

A set destination can be deleted.

-Set destinations can also be deleted by

selecting “Route”. (See “DELETING

DESTINATIONS” on page 98.)

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

2. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE

1Scroll the map to the desired point.

“A d j u s t L o c a t i o n ” : Select to adjust the posi-

tion in smaller increments.

-When an arrow facing the desired point is

selected, the map scrolls in that direction.

-The scroll stops when the selection of the

arrow is released.

2Select “Go to ”.

-The system starts route search and displays

recommended routes.

3To start guidance, select “OK”.

When “Map” is selected on the “Con-

firm Destination” screen, the map

screen will be displayed. The map loca-

tion of the selected destination can be

set as a destination.

-If a destination has already been set, “Go

to ” and “A d d t o R o u t e ” will be dis-

played.

“Go to ”: Select to delete the existing

destination(s) and set a new one.

“Add to Route”: Select to add a destina-

tion.

“Info”: If this screen button is displayed on

the top of the screen, select it to view

items such as name, address, position and

phone number.

No. Function

Current position

Destination point

Type of route and its distance

Distance of the entire route

Select to display a list of the turns re-

quired to reach the destination.

Select the desired route from 3 pos-

sible routes. (See page 88.)

Select to change the route. (See

page 89.)

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Select “3 Routes”.

2Select “Preferred”, “Alternate” or

“Short”.

-Guidance can be paused or resumed.

(See “PAUSING AND RESUMING

GUIDANCE” on page 103.)

-If “OK” is selected until a beep sounds,

demo mode will start. Press the “MAP/

VOICE” button on the Remote Touch to

end demo mode.

CAUTION

●Be sure to obey traffic regulations and

keep road conditions in mind while driv-

ing. If a traffic sign on the road has been

changed, the route guidance may not

indicate such changed information.

INFORMATION

●The route for returning may not be the

same as that for going.

●The route guidance to the destination

may not be the shortest route nor a route

without traffic congestion.

●Route guidance may not be available if

there is no road data for the specified

location.

●When setting the destination on a map

with a scale larger than 0.5 miles (800

m), the map scale changes to 0.5 miles

(800 m) automatically. If this occurs, set

the destination again.

●If a destination that is not located on a

road is set, the vehicle will be guided to

the point on a road nearest to the destina-

tion. The road nearest to the point

selected is set as the destination.

3 ROUTES SELECTION

No. Function

Select to display the recommended

route.

Select to display the alternative

route.

Select to display the route that is the

shortest distance to the set destina-

tion.

Select to display the information

shown below about each of the 3

routes.

1. DESTINATION SEARCH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Select “Edit Route”.

2This screen is displayed.

No. Function

Time necessary for the entire trip

Distance of the entire trip

Toll road

Freeway

Ferry

EDIT ROUTE

Conditions for the route to the destina-

tion can be set again.

No. Function Page

Select to add destinations. 97

Select to delete destina-

tions. 98

Select to reorder destina-

tions. 97

Select to display the choic-

es available when setting

the conditions the system

uses to determine the route

to the destination.

101

INFORMATION

●Even if the “Freeways” indicator is

dimmed, the route cannot avoid including

a freeway in some cases. (See page 101.)

●If the calculated route includes a trip by

ferry, the route guidance shows a sea

route. After you travel by ferry, the cur-

rent position may be incorrect. Upon

reception of GPS signals, it is automati-

cally corrected.

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN

During route guidance, various types of

guidance screens can be displayed de-

pending on conditions.

SCREEN LAYOUT

No. Function

Distance to the next turn and an ar-

row indicating the turning direction

Guidance route

Current position

Distance and travel/arrival time to

the destination

Current street name

INFORMATION

●If the vehicle goes off the guidance route,

the route is searched again.

●For some areas, the roads have not been

completely digitized in our database. For

this reason, the route guidance may

select a road that should not be traveled

on.

●When arriving at the set destination the

destination name will be displayed on the

top of the screen. Selecting “Off” clears

the display.

DURING FREEWAY DRIVING

During freeway driving, the freeway exit

information screen will be displayed.

This screen displays the distance to the

next junction/exit, or POIs in the vicinity

of the freeway exit.

No./

Icon

Function

Distance from the current position to

the exit or junction

Exit number and junction name

Current position

POIs that are close to a freeway exit

Current street name

Select to display the selected map of

the exit vicinity.

Select to scroll to farther junctions or

exits.

Select to scroll to closer junctions or

exits.

Select to display the closest 3 junc-

tions or exits.

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

: Select to hide the freeway guidance

screen.

-Select “Intersection”, or press the “MAP/

VOICE” button on the Remote Touch, to

change back to the freeway guidance

screen.

: Select to hide the intersection guid-

ance screen.

-Select “Intersection”, or press the “MAP/

VOICE” button on the Remote Touch, to

change back to the intersection guidance

screen.

WHEN APPROACHING A

FREEWAY EXIT OR

JUNCTION

When the vehicle approaches an exit or

junction, the freeway guidance screen

will be displayed.

No. Function

Next street name

Current position

Distance from the current position to

the exit or junction

WHEN APPROACHING AN

INTERSECTION

When the vehicle approaches an inter-

section, the intersection guidance

screen will be displayed.

No. Function

Next street name

Current position

Distance to the intersection

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

■TURN LIST SCREEN

1Select “Turn List” during guidance to

display the turn list.

■ARROW SCREEN

1Select “Turn-by-Turn Arrow” during

guidance to display the arrow screen.

OTHER SCREENS

On this screen, the list of turns on the

guidance route can be viewed.

No. Function

Turn direction

Distance between turns

Next street or destination name

Current street name

On this screen, information about the

next turn on the guidance route can be

viewed.

No. Function

Exit number or street name

Turn direction

Distance to the next turn

Current street name

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS

As the vehicle approaches an intersec-

tion, or point, where maneuvering the

vehicle is necessary, the system’s voice

guidance will provide various messages.

No. Voice guidance

“Proceed about 5 miles to Main

street.”

“In half of a mile, right turn onto Main

street.”

“Next right.”/“Right turn ahead.”

(Beep sound only)

INFORMATION

●The street names may not be pro-

nounced correctly or clearly due to the

text-to-speech function.

●On freeways, interstates or other high-

ways with higher speed limits, the voice

guidance will be made at earlier points

than on city streets in order to allow time

to maneuver the vehicle.

0.5 miles

5 miles

No. Voice guidance

“Proceed about 4 miles to the traffic

circle.”

“In half of a mile, traffic circle ahead

and then the 3rd exit onto Main

street.”

“The 3rd exit ahead.”

“The exit ahead.”

(Beep sound only)

4 miles

0.5 miles

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

*: The system indicates a U-turn if the dis-

tance between 2 one-way roads (of oppo-

site directions) is less than 50 ft. (15 m) in

residential areas or 164 ft. (50 m) in non-

residential areas.

-The system announces the approach to the

final destination.

No. Voice guidance

“In half of a mile, make a legal U-

turn.”

“Make a legal U-turn ahead.”

(Beep sound only)

No. Voice guidance

“In half of a mile, your destination is

ahead.”

“Your destination is ahead.”

“You have arrived at your destina-

tion. The route guidance is now fin-

ished.”

-If a voice guidance command cannot be

heard, press the “MAP/VOICE” button

on the Remote Touch to hear it again.

-To adjust the voice guidance volume, see

“VOICE VOLUME” on page 63.

INFORMATION

●If the system cannot determine the cur-

rent position correctly (in cases of poor

GPS signal reception), the voice guid-

ance may be early or late.

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

■ROUTES INCLUDING IPD ROADS

-After it has made a route calculation, the

system will advise the user whether IPD

roads are included in the route or not.

-The portion of the route that covers IPD

roads is indicated by light blue.

Even when on IPD roads (roads that are

not completely digitized in our data-

base), you will be guided along the

searched route via voice guidance.

No. Voice guidance

“On the way to your destination,

there will be roads with incomplete

data.”

“In half of a mile, left turn.”

“Next left. Upcoming roads have in-

complete data. Please carefully ob-

serve the local traffic restrictions, as

they may not match the navigation

guidance.”

-IPD roads are roads that are not yet com-

pletely digitized in our database. How-

ever, their geometry, name and

administrative coding are already known.

CAUTION

●Be sure to obey the traffic regulations and

keep the road condition in mind espe-

cially when you are driving on IPD roads.

The route guidance may not have the

updated information such as the direction

of a one way street.

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

3. DISTANCE AND TIME TO DESTINATION

1Select the screen button indicated by

the arrow.

2Select the number screen button to dis-

play the desired destination.

-The distance, estimated travel time and

estimated arrival time from the current

position to the selected destination are dis-

played.

When the vehicle is on the guidance

route, the distance and the estimated

travel/arrival time to the destination are

displayed. When the vehicle is not on the

guidance route, the distance and direc-

tion of the destination are displayed.

When driving on the guidance route

with more than 1 destination set, the dis-

tance and estimated travel/arrival time

from the current position to each desti-

nation are displayed.

Icon Function

Estimated travel time is dis-

played.

Estimated arrival time is dis-

played.

Select to switch to estimated ar-

rival time.

Select to switch to estimated

travel time.

Displayed while driving off the

guidance route. The destination

direction is indicated by an arrow.

INFORMATION

●When the vehicle is on the guidance

route, the distance measured along the

route is displayed. Travel time and arrival

time are calculated based on the set vehi-

cle speed information. (See “DRIVING

SPEEDS” on page 127.) However, when

the vehicle is not on the guidance route,

the distance is the linear distance

between the current position and the

destination.

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

4. SETTING AND DELETING DESTINATIONS

1Select “Route”.

2Select “A d d ” .

3Input an additional destination in the

same way as a destination search. (See

“DESTINATION SEARCH” on page

68.)

4Select the desired “A d d D e s t i n a t i o n

Here” to insert the new destination into

the route.

1Select “Route”.

2Select “Reorder”.

3Select the desired destination and se-

lect “Move Up” or “Move Down” to

change the arrival order.

4After selecting the destinations, select

“OK”.

-The system searches for the guidance

route again, and displays the entire route.

ADDING DESTINATIONS

Destinations can be added and routes

can be searched again.

REORDERING

DESTINATIONS

When more than 1 destination is set, the

arrival order of the destinations can be

changed.

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Select “Route”.

2Select “Delete”.

-When more than 1 destination is set, a list

will be displayed on the screen.

3Select the destination to be deleted.

“Delete All”: Select to delete all destina-

tions on the list.

-A message appears to confirm the request

to delete.

4Select “Yes” to delete the destination(s).

-If “Yes” is selected, the data cannot be

recovered. If more than 1 destination has

been set, the system will recalculate the

route(s) to the set destination(s) as neces-

sary.

-If “No” is selected, the previous screen will

be displayed.

DELETING DESTINATIONS

A set destination can be deleted.

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

5. SETTING ROUTE

1Select “Route”.

2Select “Detour”.

3Select a screen button to select the de-

sired detour distance.

“1 mile (km)”, “3 miles (km)” or “5 miles

(km)”: Select one of these screen buttons to

start the detour process. After detouring,

the system returns to the original guidance

route.

“Whole Route”: Select to make the system

calculate an entire new route to the destina-

tion.

“A r o u n d Tr a f f i c ” : Select to make the system

search for the route based on the traffic

congestion information received from XM

NavTraffic®. For details, see “XM

NavTraffic®” on page 341.

DETOUR SETTING

While the route guidance is operating,

the route can be changed to detour

around a section of the route where a

delay is caused by road repairs, or an ac-

cident, etc.

INFORMATION

●This picture shows an example of how the

system would guide around a delay

caused by a traffic jam.

This position indicates the location of a

traffic jam caused by road repairs, an ac-

cident, etc.

This route indicates the detour suggest-

ed by the system.

●When the vehicle is on a freeway, the

detour distance selections are 5, 15 and

25 miles (or 5, 15 and 25 km if units are

in km).

●The system may not be able to calculate a

detour route depending on the selected

distance and surrounding road condi-

tions.

100

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Select “Route”.

2Select “Overview”.

3The entire route from the current posi-

tion to the destination is displayed.

1Select or to skip to the next page

of the list of roads. Select and hold or

to scroll through the list of roads.

: This mark indicates the direction in which

you should turn at the intersection.

“Map”: The selected point is displayed on

the map screen.

ROUTE OVERVIEW

No. Function

Select to display a list of the turns re-

quired to reach the destination.

Select to start guidance.

TURN LIST

INFORMATION

●However, not all road names in the route

may appear on the list. If a road changes

its name without requiring a turn (such as

on a street that runs through 2 or more

cities), the name change will not appear

on the list. The street names will be dis-

played in order from the starting point,

along with the distance to the next turn.

101

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1Select “Route”.

2Select “Preferences”.

3Select “Preferred”, “Short” or “Alter-

nate” and select “OK”.

4The entire route from the starting point

to the destination is displayed.

“OK”: Select to start guidance.

1Select “Route”.

ROUTE PREFERENCE

TO SELECT ROUTE TYPE

The Preferred, Short or Alternative

route can be selected.

“Edit Route”: Select to change a route.

(See page 89.)

TO SELECT ROUTE FEATURES

A number of choices are available when

setting the conditions the system uses to

determine the route to the destination.

102

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

2Select “Preferences” to display condi-

tions that can be selected when the sys-

tem determines the route to the

destination.

3Select the desired route preferences.

-The system will avoid using routes that

include items whose indicators are off.

4After selecting the desired route prefer-

ence, select “OK”.

1Select “Route”.

2Select “Preferences”.

3Select “Start from Adjacent Road”.

STARTING ROUTE FROM

ADJACENT ROAD

The route guidance can be started from

an adjacent road.

(e.g. When route guidance is set on the

freeway, but the vehicle is driven parallel

along the freeway.)

INFORMATION

●When there is no adjacent road, this

screen button will not be displayed.

103

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1Select “Route”.

2Select “Pause Guidance”.

-The screen will return to the current posi-

tion map without route guidance.

1Select “Route”.

2Select “Resume Guidance”.

-The map screen, with the current position

displayed, will be returned to.

PAUSING AND RESUMING

GUIDANCE

TO PAUSE GUIDANCE

INFORMATION

●Without route guidance, “Pause Guid-

ance” cannot be used.

TO RESUME GUIDANCE

104

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Select “Show on Map”.

2Select “Select POI” to display a partic-

ular type of POI icon on the screen.

-When the POI icons to be displayed on the

map screen have already been set,

“Change POI” is displayed.

-A screen with a limited choice of POI will

be displayed. (To change the displayed POI

list, see page 129.)

1Select the desired POIs category to dis-

play POI location icons on the map

screen.

-By selecting the desired POI category and

then selecting “OK”, the selected POI

icons are displayed on the map screen.

-To turn off the POI icons on the map

screen, select “Clear”.

“Other POIs”: Select to display other POIs

categories if the desired POIs cannot be

found on the limited choice screen.

“Find Local POI”: Select to search for the

nearest POIs. Then select one of the cate-

gories. The system will list the points within

20 miles (32 km). (See page 105.)

2Select “Other POIs” on the “Select POI

Icons” screen.

-When a POI category is selected from

either the limited list or the complete list,

the icons of those locations will be dis-

played on the map screen.

SHOW ON MAP

DISPLAY POI ICONS

POI icons such as gas stations and res-

taurants can be displayed on the map

screen. Their location can also be set as

a destination and used for route guid-

ance.

SELECTING POI ICONS TO BE

DISPLAYED

Up to 5 categories of icons can be dis-

played on the map screen.

105

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

3Select the desired POI categories.

-The selected category’s icon will appear on

the top left of the screen.

-By selecting the desired POI category and

then selecting “OK”, the selected POI

icons are displayed on the map screen.

-If the desired POI category is not on the

screen, select “List All Categories” to list

all POI categories.

-Select the desired POI categories from the

list.

• The selected category icon appears on

the top left of the screen.

• By selecting the desired POI category

and then selecting “OK”, the selected

POI icons are displayed on the map

screen.

• To return to the POI category selection

screen, select “More”.

1Select “Find Local POI”.

2Select the screen button of the desired

POI.

-The selected POIs are displayed on the

map screen.

“Near...”: Select to search for POIs near the

current position or along the route.

TO DISPLAY THE LOCAL POI

LIST

Points of Interest that are within

20 miles (32 km) of the current position

will be listed from among the selected

categories.

106

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Directly select the desired POI icon to

set it as a destination.

-The map will shift so that the icon is cen-

tered on the screen and overlaps with the

cursor . At this time, the distance from

the current position is displayed on the

screen. The distance shown is measured as

a straight line from the current position to

the POI.

2When the desired POI overlaps with the

cursor, select “Enter ”.

-The screen changes and displays the map

location of the selected destination and

route preference. (See “STARTING

ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 87.)

1Select “Show on Map”.

2Select “POI Icons”.

-The “POI Icons” indicator is dimmed.

-The map screen will be displayed with the

POI icons hidden.

-To display the POI icons again, select “POI

Icons” on the “Show on Map” screen.

No. Function

Select to display the list of POIs near

the current position.

Select to display the list of POIs

along the route.

TO SET A POI AS A

DESTINATION

One of the Point of Interest icons can be

selected on the map screen as a destina-

tion and can be used for route guidance.

TO HIDE POI ICONS

107

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1Select “Show on Map”.

2Select “Route Trace”.

-The “Route Trace” indicator is highlighted.

1Select “Show on Map”.

2Select “Route Trace”.

-Selecting “Yes” stops recording and the

route trace remains displayed on the

screen.

-Selecting “No” stops recording and the

route trace is erased.

ROUTE TRACE

Up to 124 miles (200 km) of the trav-

eled route can be stored and retraced

on the display.

INFORMATION

●This feature is available when the map

scale is more than 30 miles (50 km).

TO START RECORDING THE

ROUTE TRACE

TO STOP RECORDING THE

ROUTE TRACE

108

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

3. ADDRESS BOOK

1. NAVIGATION SETTINGS

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Setup”.

3Select “Navigation”.

4Select the desired items to be set.

-On this screen, the following operations

can be performed:

Points or areas on the map can be regis-

tered.

The registered points can be used on the

“Destination” screen. (See “DESTINA-

TION SEARCH BY HOME” on page

69, and “DESTINATION SEARCH BY

“Address Book”” on page 81.)

Registered areas to avoid, will be avoid-

ed when the system searches for a route.

No. Function Page

Select to set home. 109

Select to set preset destina-

tions. 111

Select to set the address

book. 114

Select to set areas to avoid. 119

Select to delete previous

destinations. 124

Select to set detailed navi-

gation settings. 125

109

3. ADDRESS BOOK

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

3Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

4Select “Home”.

5Select the desired screen button.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

3Select “Home” on the “Navigation Set-

tings” screen.

4Select “Set Home”.

SETTING UP THE “Home”

If home has been registered, that infor-

mation can be recalled by selecting “Go

Home” on the “Destination” screen.

(See “DESTINATION SEARCH BY

HOME” on page 69.)

No. Function Page

Registering home 109

Editing home 110

Deleting home 111

REGISTERING HOME

110

3. ADDRESS BOOK

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

5Select the desired screen button and

enter the location in the same way as for

a destination search. (See “DESTINA-

TION SEARCH” on page 68.)

-When registration of home is completed,

the “Edit Home” screen will be displayed.

6Select “OK”.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

3Select “Home” on the “Navigation Set-

tings” screen.

4Select “Edit”.

5Select “Edit” next to the item to be edit-

ed.

“Show Name on Map”: The name of a home

can be set to be displayed on the map by se-

lecting “On” or “Off”. (See page 117.)

6Select “OK”.

-To edit registered information, see

“EDITING HOME” on page 110.

EDITING HOME

No. Function Page

Select to edit the home

name. The name can be dis-

played on the map.

117

Select to edit location infor-

mation. 117

Select to edit the phone

number. 118

Select to change the icon to

be displayed on the map. 116

111

3. ADDRESS BOOK

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

3Select “Home” on the “Navigation Set-

tings” screen.

4Select “Delete”.

5Select “Yes” to delete home and select

“No” to cancel the deletion.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

3Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

4Select “Preset Destinations”.

DELETING HOME SETTING UP THE “Preset

Destinations”

If preset destination has been regis-

tered, that information can be recalled

by using “Preset Destinations” on the

“Navigation Settings” screen. (See

“DESTINATION SEARCH BY PRE-

SET DESTINATIONS” on page 69.)

112

3. ADDRESS BOOK

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

5Select the desired screen button.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

3Select “Preset Destinations” on the

“Navigation Settings” screen.

4Select “Set”.

5Select the desired screen button and

enter the location in the same way as for

a destination search. (See “DESTINA-

TION SEARCH” on page 68.)

6Select a position for this preset destina-

tion.

-When registration of a preset destination is

completed, the “Edit Preset Destination”

screen will be displayed.

7Select “OK”.

No. Function Page

Registering a preset desti-

nation 112

Editing a preset destination 113

Deleting a preset destina-

tion 113

REGISTERING PRESET

DESTINATIONS

-To edit registered information, see

“EDITING PRESET DESTINATIONS”

on page 113.

113

3. ADDRESS BOOK

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

3Select “Preset Destinations” on the

“Navigation Settings” screen.

4Select “Edit”.

5Select the screen button of the desired

preset destination.

6Select “Edit” next to the item to be edit-

ed.

“Show Name on Map”: The name of a pre-

set destination can be set to be displayed on

the map by selecting “On” or “Off”. (See

page 117.)

7Select “OK”.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

3Select “Preset Destinations” on the

“Navigation Settings” screen.

EDITING PRESET

DESTINATIONS

No. Function Page

Select to edit the preset

destination name. The

name can be displayed on

the map.

117

Select to edit location infor-

mation. 117

Select to edit the phone

number. 118

Select to change the icon to

be displayed on the map. 116

DELETING PRESET

DESTINATIONS

114

3. ADDRESS BOOK

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

4Select “Delete”.

5Select the preset destination to be de-

leted.

6Select “Delete”.

7Select “Yes” to delete the preset desti-

nation and select “No” to cancel the de-

letion.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

3Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

4Select “Address Book”.

5Select the desired screen button.

Screen button Function

“Select All” Select all preset destina-

tions.

“Unselect All” Select to cancel the

“Select All” function.

SETTING UP THE “Address

Book”

Points or areas on the map can be regis-

tered.

No. Function Page

Registering address book

entries 115

Editing address book en-

tries 115

Deleting address book en-

tries 118

115

3. ADDRESS BOOK

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

3Select “Address Book” on the “Naviga-

tion Settings” screen.

4Select “New”.

5Select the desired screen button and

enter the location in the same way as for

a destination search. (See “DESTINA-

TION SEARCH” on page 68.)

-After the address book entry has been reg-

istered, the “Edit Address Book Entry”

screen will be displayed.

6Select “OK”.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

3Select “Address Book” on the “Naviga-

tion Settings” screen.

4Select “Edit”.

5Select the screen button of the desired

address book entry.

REGISTERING ADDRESS

BOOK ENTRIES

-To edit registered information, see

“EDITING ADDRESS BOOK

ENTRIES” on page 115.

INFORMATION

●Up to 100 address book entries can be

registered.

EDITING ADDRESS BOOK

ENTRIES

The icon, name, location and/or phone

number of a registered address book

entry can be edited.

116

3. ADDRESS BOOK

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

6Select “Edit” next to the item to be edit-

ed.

“Show Name on Map”: The name of an ad-

dress book entry can be set to be displayed

on the map by selecting “On” or “Off”. (See

page 117.)

7Select “OK”.

■TO CHANGE “Icon”

1Select “Edit”.

2Select the desired icon.

-Change pages by selecting the “Page 1”,

“Page 2” or “With Sound” tab.

■SOUND ICONS

1Select the “With Sound” tab on the “Ad-

dress Book Entry Icon” screen.

2Select the desired sound icon.

-The next screen appears when “Bell (with

Direction)” is selected.

No. Function Page

Select to edit the address

book entry name. The

name can be displayed on

the map.

117

Select to edit location infor-

mation. 117

Select to edit the phone

number. 118

Select to change the icon to

be displayed on the map. 116

A sound for some address book entries

can be set. When the vehicle approach-

es the location of the address book en-

try, the selected sound will be heard.

117

3. ADDRESS BOOK

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

3Select either or to adjust the di-

rection. Then select “OK”.

■TO CHANGE “Name”

1Select “Edit”.

2Enter the name using the alphanumeric

keys.

-Up to 70 characters can be entered.

3Select “OK”.

-The previous screen will be displayed.

■DISPLAYING ADDRESS BOOK

ENTRY NAMES

1Select “On” to display the name on the

map and select “Off” to not display it.

■TO CHANGE “Location”

1Select “Edit”.

2Select one of the 8 directional screen

buttons to move the cursor to the de-

sired point on the map.

3Select “OK”.

-The previous screen will be displayed.

INFORMATION

●The bell sounds only when the vehicle

approaches this point in the direction that

has been set.

118

3. ADDRESS BOOK

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

■TO CHANGE “Phone #”

(PHONE NUMBER)

1Select “Edit”.

2Enter the number using the number

keys.

3Select “OK”.

-The previous screen will be displayed.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

3Select “Address Book” on the “Naviga-

tion Settings” screen.

4Select “Delete”.

5Select the address to be deleted.

6Select “Delete”.

7Select “Yes” to delete the address book

entries and select “No” to cancel the de-

letion.

DELETING ADDRESS BOOK

ENTRIES

Screen button Function

“Select All” Select all registered ad-

dresses.

“Unselect All” Select to cancel the

“Select All” function.

119

3. ADDRESS BOOK

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

3Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

4Select “A r e a s t o Av o i d ” .

5Select the desired screen button.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

3Select “A r e a s t o Av o i d ” on the “Naviga-

tion Settings” screen.

4Select “New”.

SETTING UP THE “Areas to

Avoid”

Areas to be avoided because of traffic

jams, construction work or other rea-

sons can be registered as areas to avoid.

No. Function Page

Registering areas to avoid 119

Editing areas to avoid 120

Deleting areas to avoid 123

REGISTERING AREAS TO

AVOID

120

3. ADDRESS BOOK

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

5Select the desired screen button and

enter the location in the same way as for

a destination search, or display the map

of the area to be avoided. (See “DESTI-

NATION SEARCH” on page 68.)

6Scroll the map to the desired point.

“A d j u s t L o c a t i o n ” : Select to adjust the posi-

tion in smaller increments.

7Select “Enter”.

8Select either or to change the

size of the area to be avoided.

9Select “OK”.

-When registration of an area to avoid is

completed, the “Area to Avoid” screen will

be displayed.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

3Select “A r e a s t o Av o i d ” on the “Naviga-

tion Settings” screen.

4Select “Edit”.

5Select the area to be avoided.

INFORMATION

●If a destination is input in the area to avoid

or the route calculation cannot be made

without running through the area to

avoid, a route passing through the area to

be avoided may be shown.

●Up to 10 locations can be registered as

points/areas to avoid.

EDITING AREA TO AVOID

The name, location and/or area size of a

registered area can be edited.

121

3. ADDRESS BOOK

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

6Select “Edit” next to the item to be edit-

ed.

“Show Name on Map”: The name of an area to

be avoided can be set to be displayed on the

map by selecting “On” or “Off”. (See page

121.)

“Active”: The area to avoid feature can be

set to “On” or “Off”.

7Select “OK”.

■TO CHANGE “Name”

1Select “Edit”.

2Enter the name using the alphanumeric

keys.

-Up to 70 characters can be entered.

3Select “OK”.

-The previous screen will be displayed.

■DISPLAYING NAMES OF AREAS

TO BE AVOIDED

1Select “On”, next to “Show Name on

Map”, to display the name of an area to

be avoided on the map. Select “Off” not

to display it.

No. Function Page

Select to edit the name of

the area to avoid. The name

can be displayed on the

map.

121

Select to edit area location. 122

Select to edit area size. 122

122

3. ADDRESS BOOK

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

■TO CHANGE “Location”

1Select “Edit”.

2Select one of the 8 directional screen

buttons to move the cursor to the de-

sired point on the map.

3Select “OK”.

-The previous screen will be displayed.

■TO CHANGE “Size”

1Select “Edit”.

2Select either or to change the

size of the area to be avoided.

3Select “OK”.

-The previous screen will be displayed.

123

3. ADDRESS BOOK

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

3Select “A r e a s t o Av o i d ” on the “Naviga-

tion Settings” screen.

4Select “Delete”.

5Select the area to be deleted.

6Select “Delete”.

7Select “Yes” to delete the area(s) and

select “No” to cancel the deletion.

DELETING AREAS TO AVOID

Screen button Function

“Select All” Select all registered ar-

eas to avoid.

“Unselect All” Select to cancel the

“Select All” function.

124

3. ADDRESS BOOK

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

3Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

4Select “Delete Previous Dest.”.

5Select the previous destination to be de-

leted.

6Select “Delete”.

7Select “Yes” to delete the destination(s)

and select “No” to cancel the deletion.

DELETING PREVIOUS

DESTINATIONS

Previous destinations can be deleted.

Screen button Function

“Select All” Select all previous desti-

nations.

“Unselect All” Select to cancel the

“Select All” function.

125

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

4. SETUP

1. DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Setup”.

3Select “Navigation”.

4Select “Detailed Navi. Settings”.

5Select the items to be set.

6Select “Save”.

-On this screen, the following functions can

be performed:

Settings are available for driving speeds,

favorite POI categories, automatic

screen change, “ Off” function, etc.

SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION

SETTINGS

126

4. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

-To reset all setup items, select “Default”.

No. Function

Select to set the average cruising

speed. (See “DRIVING SPEEDS”

on page 127.)

Select to set the automatic input

function to “On” or “Off”.

Select to set the voice guidance for

the next street name to “On” or

“Off” during route guidance.

Select to set the automatic reroute of

the guidance route to avoid heavy

congestion to “On” or “Off”. (See

“AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC” on page

127.)

Select to set the indication of freely

flowing traffic by the arrow to “On”

or “Off”. (See “SHOW FREE

FLOWING TRAFFIC” on page

128.)

Select to set displayed POI icon cat-

egories. (See “POI CATEGORY

CHANGE (SELECT POI ICONS)”

on page 129.)

Select to set screen buttons to be

displayed on the map screen when

“ Off” is selected. (See

“SCREEN LAYOUT FUNCTION

(“ Off” Function)” on page 130.)

Select to adjust the current position

mark manually. Miscalculation of the

distance caused by tire replacement

can also be adjusted. (See “CUR-

RENT POSITION/TIRE CHANGE

CALIBRATION” on page 130.)

Select to set the display of pop-up in-

formation to “On” or “Off”. (See

“POP-UP INFORMATION” on

page 132.)

Select to set IPD road guidance to

“On” or “Off”. (For information on

IPD roads, see page 95.)

No. Function

127

4. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

3Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the

“Navigation Settings” screen.

4Select “Driving Speeds”.

5Select “” or “” to set the average ve-

hicle speeds for “Residential”, “Main

Streets” and “Freeways”.

-To set the default speeds, select “Default”.

-To use settings based on traffic information,

select “Consider Traffic Info.”.

6After setting of the desired speeds is

completed, select “Save”.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

3Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the

“Navigation Settings” screen.

4Select “Av o i d Tr a f f i c ” .

DRIVING SPEEDS

The speed that is used for the calculation

of the estimated travel time and estimat-

ed arrival time can be set.

INFORMATION

●The displayed time to the destination is

the approximate driving time that is cal-

culated based on the selected speeds

and the actual position along the guid-

ance route.

●The time shown on the screen may vary

greatly depending on progress along the

route, which may be affected by condi-

tions such as traffic jams and construction

work.

●Up to 99 hours 59 minutes can be dis-

played.

AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC

The guidance route automatically

changes to another route to avoid heavy

congestion when “Avoid Traffic” is

turned on.

128

4. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

5Select “On” or “Off”.

6Select “Save”.

-When congestion information about the

guidance route has been received, a

screen will appear to ask if it is desirable to

reroute to avoid the congestion.

-Select “Yes” to reroute. Another route to

avoid the congestion will appear.

-Select “No” if it is not desirable to reroute.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

3Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the

“Navigation Settings” screen.

4Select “Show Free Flowing Traffic”.

5Select “On” or “Off”.

6Select “Save”.

INFORMATION

●When the “Traffic Information” indicator

is dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic Incident

Warning” and “Show Free Flowing Traffic”

will not operate. (See page 342.)

SHOW FREE FLOWING

TRAFFIC

Free flowing traffic can be shown by an

arrow when “Show Free Flowing Traf-

fic” is turned on.

INFORMATION

●When the “Traffic Information” indicator

is dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic Incident

Warning” and “Show Free Flowing Traffic”

will not operate. (See page 342.)

129

4. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

3Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the

“Navigation Settings” screen.

4Select “Favorite POI Categories”.

5Select the category to be changed.

6Select the desired group.

-If the desired POI category is not on the

screen, select “List All Categories” to list

all POI categories.

7Select the desired category.

-The screen returns to the “Favorite POI

Categories” screen.

8Select “OK”.

POI CATEGORY CHANGE

(SELECT POI ICONS)

Select up to 6 POI icons to be displayed

on the map screen.

130

4. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

3Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the

“Navigation Settings” screen.

4Select ““ Off” Function”.

5Select the screen buttons to be turned

off. The selected screen buttons will be

dimmed.

-To set the setting as a default, select

“Default”.

6Select “OK”.

-The previous screen will be displayed.

7Select “Save”.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

3Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the

“Navigation Settings” screen.

4Select “Calibration”.

5Select the desired screen button.

SCREEN LAYOUT FUNCTION

(“ Off” Function)

Each screen button and current street

name on the map screen can be dis-

played or hidden.

CURRENT POSITION/TIRE

CHANGE CALIBRATION

The current position mark can be adjust-

ed manually. Miscalculation of the dis-

tance caused by tire replacement can

also be adjusted.

-For additional information on the accu-

racy of a current position, see “LIMITA-

TIONS OF THE NAVIGATION

SYSTEM” on page 139.

131

4. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

■POSITION/DIRECTION CALI-

BRATION

1Select “Position / Direction”.

2Select one of the 8 directional screen

buttons to move the cursor to the de-

sired point on the map.

3Select “OK”.

4Select either or to adjust the di-

rection of the current position mark.

5Select “OK”.

-The map will be displayed.

■TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION

1To perform the distance calibration pro-

cedure, select “Tire Change”.

-The message appears and the quick dis-

tance calibration is automatically started. A

few seconds later, a map will be displayed.

When driving, the current position mark

will be automatically corrected by GPS

signals. If GPS reception is poor due to

location, the current position mark can

be adjusted manually.

The tire change calibration function will

be used when replacing the tires. This

function will adjust miscalculation

caused by the circumference difference

between the old and new tires.

132

4. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”

screen.

3Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the

“Navigation Settings” screen.

4Select “Pop-up Information”.

5Select “On” or “Off”.

6Select “Save”.

-When “Pop-up Information” is turned off,

the following messages will not be dis-

played.

This message appears when the map

scale is over 0.5 miles (800 m).

This message appears when the map is

switched to dual map screen mode.

INFORMATION

●If this procedure is not performed when

the tires are replaced, the current posi-

tion mark may be incorrectly displayed.

POP-UP INFORMATION

When “Pop-up information” is turned

on, pop-up information will be displayed.

133

4. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

2. VEHICLE SETTINGS

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Setup”.

3Select “Vehicle”.

4Select “Maintenance”.

5Select the desired screen button.

-Setting maintenance information. (See

page 133.)

-Setting dealer. (See page 135.)

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select “Maintenance” on the “Vehicle

Settings” screen.

MAINTENANCE

When the navigation system is turned

on, the “Maintenance Reminder” screen

displays when it is time to replace a part

or certain components. (See page 32.)

MAINTENANCE

INFORMATION SETTING

134

4. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

4Select the desired screen button.

-When the vehicle needs to be serviced, the

screen button color will change to orange.

Screen button Function

“Engine oil” Replace engine oil

“Oil filter” Replace engine oil filter

“Rotation” Rotate tires

“Tires” Replace tires

“Battery” Replace 12-volt battery

“Brake pad” Replace brake pads

“Wipers” Replace wiper blades

“Coolant” Replace coolant

“Brake oil” Replace brake fluid

“Trans. fluid” Replace transmission flu-

“Service” Scheduled maintenance

“Air filter” Replace air filter

“Personal”

New information items

can be created separately

from provided ones.

“Delete All”

Select to cancel all condi-

tions which have been in-

put.

“Reset All”

Select to reset the item

which has satisfied a con-

dition.

“Set Dealer”

Select to register dealer

information. (See “DEAL-

ER SETTING” on page

135.)

“Dealer Info.”

Select to edit dealer infor-

mation. (See “DEALER

SETTING” on page 135.)

“Reminder”

When this screen button

is selected, the indicator is

illuminated. The system is

set to give maintenance

information with the

“Maintenance Reminder”

screen. (See page 32.)

Screen button Function

135

4. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

5Input the conditions.

6Select “OK”.

-The screen then returns to the “Mainte-

nance” screen.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select “Maintenance” on the “Vehicle

Settings” screen.

4Select “Set Dealer”.

5If a dealer has not been registered, enter

the location of a dealer in the same way

as for a destination search. (See “DES-

TINATION SEARCH” on page 68.)

No. Function

Select to input the next maintenance

date.

Select to input the driving distance

until the next maintenance check.

Select to cancel the date and distance

conditions.

Select to reset the date and distance

conditions.

INFORMATION

●For scheduled maintenance information,

refer to “Warranty and Services Guide/

Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled

Maintenance”.

●Depending on driving or road conditions,

the actual date and distance maintenance

should be performed may differ from the

stored date and distance in the system.

DEALER SETTING

Dealer information can be registered in

the system. With dealer information reg-

istered, route guidance to the dealer is

available.

136

4. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

-When “Set Dealer” registration is finished,

the “Dealer” screen is displayed.

6Select “Edit” next to the item to be edit-

ed.

■TO EDIT “Dealer” OR “Contact”

1Select “Edit” next to “Dealer” or “Con-

tact”.

2Enter the name using the alphanumeric

keys.

-Up to 70 characters can be entered for

dealer and 24 characters for contact.

3Select “OK”.

-The previous screen will be displayed.

No. Function

Select to enter the name of a dealer.

(See page 136.)

Select to enter the name of a dealer

member. (See page 136.)

Select to set the location. (See page

137.)

Select to enter the phone number.

(See page 137.)

Select to delete the dealer informa-

tion displayed on the screen.

Select to set the displayed dealer as a

destination. (See “STARTING

ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 87.)

137

4. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

■TO EDIT “Location”

1Select “Edit” next to “Location”.

2Select one of the 8 directional screen

buttons to move the cursor to the de-

sired point on the map screen.

3Select “OK”.

-The previous screen will be displayed.

■TO EDIT “Phone #”

(PHONE NUMBER)

1Select “Edit” next to “Phone #”.

2Enter the number using number keys.

3Select “OK”.

-The previous screen will be displayed.

138

4. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

3Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.

4Select “Vehicle Customization”.

5Select the desired items to be set.

-For a list of the settings that can be

changed, refer to “Owner’s Manual”.

6After changing the settings, select

“Save”. A message indicating that the

settings are being saved will appear. Do

not perform any other operations while

this message is displayed.

VEHICLE CUSTOMIZATION

Vehicle settings can be changed.

CAUTION

●When performing the customization pro-

cedure, ensure that there is sufficient ven-

tilation in the vehicle and surrounding

area. If there is insufficient ventilation,

exhaust gases may collect and enter the

vehicle. Exhaust gases include harmful

carbon monoxide (CO) and inhaling

them may lead to death or a serious

health hazard.

INFORMATION

●To avoid discharging the 12-volt battery,

perform the customization procedure

with the engine running <the hybrid sys-

tem operating>.

139

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)

1. LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

The Global Positioning System (GPS) de-

veloped and operated by the U.S. Depart-

ment of Defense provides an accurate

current position, normally using 4 or more

satellites, and in some case 3 satellites. The

GPS system has a certain level of inaccura-

cy. While the navigation system will com-

pensate for this most of the time, occasional

positioning errors of up to 300 ft. (100 m)

can and should be expected. Generally, po-

sition errors will be corrected within a few

seconds.

When the vehicle is receiving signals from

satellites, the “GPS” mark appears at the

top left of the screen.

The GPS signal may be physically obstruct-

ed, leading to inaccurate vehicle position on

the map screen. Tunnels, tall buildings,

trucks, or even the placement of objects on

the instrument panel may obstruct the GPS

signals.

The GPS satellites may not send signals due

to repairs or improvements being made to

them.

Even when the navigation system is receiv-

ing clear GPS signals, the vehicle position

may not be shown accurately or inappropri-

ate route guidance may occur in some cas-

es.

This navigation system calculates the

current position using satellite signals,

various vehicle signals, map data, etc.

However, an accurate position may not

be shown depending on satellite condi-

tions, road configuration, vehicle condi-

tion or other circumstances.

NOTICE

●The installation of window tinting may

obstruct the GPS signals. Most window

tinting contains some metallic content

that will interfere with GPS signal recep-

tion of the antenna in the instrument

panel. We advise against the use of win-

dow tinting on vehicles equipped with

navigation systems.

140

5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

-Accurate current position may not be

shown in the following cases:

• When driving on a small angled Y-shaped

road.

• When driving on a winding road.

• When driving on a slippery road such as

in sand, gravel, snow, etc.

• When driving on a long straight road.

• When freeway and surface streets run in

parallel.

• After moving by ferry or vehicle carrier.

• When a long route is searched during

high speed driving.

• When driving without setting the current

position calibration correctly.

• After repeating a change of direction by

going forward and backward, or turning

on a turntable in a parking lot.

• When leaving a covered parking lot or

parking garage.

• When a roof carrier is installed.

• When driving with tire chains installed.

• When the tires are worn.

• After replacing a tire or tires.

• When using tires that are smaller or

larger than the factory specifications.

• When the tire pressure in any of the 4

tires is not correct.

-Inappropriate route guidance may occur in

the following cases:

• When turning at an intersection off the

designated route guidance.

• If you set more than 1 destination but skip

any of them, auto reroute will display a

route returning to the destination on the

previous route.

• When turning at an intersection for which

there is no route guidance.

• When passing through an intersection for

which there is no route guidance.

• During auto reroute, the route guidance

may not be available for the next turn to

the right or left.

• During high speed driving, it may take a

long time for auto reroute to operate. In

auto reroute, a detour route may be

shown.

• After auto reroute, the route may not be

changed.

• If an unnecessary U-turn is shown or

announced.

• If a location has multiple names and the

system announces 1 or more of them.

• When a route cannot be searched.

• If the route to your destination includes

gravel, unpaved roads or alleys, the route

guidance may not be shown.

• Your destination point might be shown on

the opposite side of the street.

• When a portion of the route has regula-

tions prohibiting the entry of the vehicle

that vary by time or season or other rea-

sons.

• The road and map data stored in the navi-

gation system may not be complete or

may not be the latest version.

-If the vehicle cannot receive GPS signals,

the current position can be adjusted

manually. For information on setting the

current position calibration, see page

130.

141

5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

-After replacing a tire, implement the

operation described in “TIRE CHANGE

CALIBRATION”. (See page 131.)

INFORMATION

●This navigation system uses tire turning

data and is designed to work with factory-

specified tires for the vehicle. Installing

tires that are larger or smaller than the

originally equipped diameter may cause

inaccurate display of the current position.

The tire pressure also affects the diame-

ter of the tires, so make sure that the tire

pressure of all 4 tires is correct.

142

5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

143

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.04.18 16:48

1. QUICK REFERENCE ............................ 144

2. PHONE (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM

FOR CELLULAR PHONE)................ 146

USING THE PHONE SWITCH........................ 147

USING THE STEERING SWITCHES............ 148

ABOUT THE PHONEBOOK IN THIS

SYSTEM .................................................................... 149

WHEN SELLING OR DISPOSING

OF THE VEHICLE ............................................... 149

3. REGISTER A Bluetooth®

PHONE..................................................... 152

CONNECTING A Bluetooth®

PHONE..................................................................... 154

RECONNECTING THE Bluetooth®

PHONE..................................................................... 156

4. CALL ON THE Bluetooth®

PHONE..................................................... 157

BY DIAL........................................................................ 157

BY PHONEBOOK ................................................. 157

BY SPEED DIAL ....................................................... 159

BY CALL HISTORY ............................................... 160

BY VOICE RECOGNITION.............................. 161

CALLING USING AN SMS/

MMS MESSAGE .................................................. 164

BY POI* CALL.......................................................... 164

5. RECEIVE ON THE Bluetooth®

PHONE..................................................... 165

6. TALK ON THE Bluetooth®

PHONE...................................................... 166

WHEN YOU SELECT “0-9”.............................. 166

INCOMING CALL WAITING......................... 168

7. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE

FUNCTION............................................. 169

CHECKING MESSAGES................................... 169

REPLYING (QUICK REPLY)............................ 170

NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION.................. 171

1. PHONE SETTINGS................................. 172

PHONE SOUND SETTINGS............................ 172

PHONEBOOK......................................................... 174

MESSAGE SETTINGS.......................................... 187

PHONE DISPLAY SETTINGS........................... 191

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS ........................... 194

REGISTERED DEVICES ...................................... 194

SELECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE.............. 198

SELECTING PORTABLE PLAYER.............. 200

DETAILED Bluetooth® SETTINGS ................. 201

1PHONE OPERATION

2SETUP

PHONE

*: Point of Interest

144

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1. PHONE OPERATION

1. QUICK REFERENCE

Bluetooth® phones can be operated via the navigation system’s screen. To display the

hands-free operation screen, press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch and

then select “Phone”, or the switch on the steering wheel.

145

1. PHONE OPERATION

PHONE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

No. Name Function

The condition

of Bluetooth®

connection

No connection Good

An antenna for the Bluetooth® connection is built in the instrument

panel. The condition of the Bluetooth® connection may deteriorate

and the system may not function when a Bluetooth® phone is used in

the following conditions and/or places:

The cellular phone is obstructed by certain objects (such as when

it is behind the seat or in the glove box and console box).

The cellular phone touches or is covered with metal materials.

Leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place where the condition of the

Bluetooth® connection is good.

When the cellular phone is not connected, “No Connect” is dis-

played.

The amount of

battery charge

left

Empty Full

This is not displayed when the Bluetooth® is not connected.

The amount displayed does not always correspond with the amount

displayed on the cellular phone. The amount of battery charge left

may not be displayed depending on the type of phone you have. This

system does not have a charging function.

The receiving

area

“Rm” is displayed when receiving in a roaming area.

The receiving area may not be displayed depending on the type of

phone you have.

The level of

reception

Poor Excellent

The level of reception does not always correspond with the level dis-

played on the cellular phone. The level of reception may not be dis-

played depending on the phone you have.

When the cellular phone is out of the service area or in a place inac-

cessible by radio waves, “No Service” is displayed.

146

1. PHONE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

2. PHONE (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONE)

The hands-free system enables calls to

be made and received without having to

take your hands off the steering wheel.

This system supports Bluetooth®.

Bluetooth® is a wireless data system

that enables cellular phones to be used

without being connected by a cable or

placed in a cradle.

The operating procedure of the phone is

explained here.

-For registering and setting of the phone,

see “PHONE SETTINGS” on page 172

and “Bluetooth® SETTINGS” on page

194.

CAUTION

●While driving, do not use a cellular phone

or connect the Bluetooth® phone.

●An antenna for the Bluetooth® connec-

tion is built in the instrument panel. Peo-

ple with implanted pacemakers or

cardiac defibrillators should maintain a

reasonable distance between them-

selves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The

radio waves may affect the operation of

such devices.

●Before using cellular phones, users of any

electrical medical device other than

implanted pacemakers and implanted

cardiac defibrillators should consult the

manufacturer of the device for informa-

tion about its operation under the influ-

ence of radio waves. Radio waves could

have unexpected effects on the operation

of such medical devices.

NOTICE

●Do not leave your cellular phone in the

vehicle. The temperature inside may rise

to a level that could damage the phone.

INFORMATION

●If your cellular phone does not support

Bluetooth®, this system cannot function.

●In the following conditions, the system

may not function:

• The cellular phone is turned off.

• The current position is outside the com-

munication area.

• The cellular phone is not connected.

• The cellular phone has a low battery.

●When using Bluetooth® audio and

hands-free at the same time, the following

problems may occur:

•The Bluetooth

® connection may be cut.

• Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth®

audio playback.

147

1. PHONE OPERATION

PHONE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

*: This profile is necessary when using

Apps. (See “APPS” on page 356.)

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

-The microphone can be used when talking

on the phone.

INFORMATION

●This system supports the following ser-

vices:

• Bluetooth® Specification

Ver.1.1 or higher

(Recommended: Ver.2.1 + EDR or

higher)

• Profiles

HFP (Hands Free Profile)

Ver.1.0 or higher

(Recommended: Ver.1.5 or higher)

OPP (Object Push Profile)

Ver.1.1 or higher

PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)

Ver.1.0 or higher

MAP (Message Access Profile)

Ver.1.0 or higher

SPP (Serial Port Profile)

Ver.1.1 or higher*

●If your cellular phone does not support

HFP, registering the Bluetooth® phone

or using OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP pro-

files individually will not be possible.

●If the connected Bluetooth® phone ver-

sion is older than recommended or

incompatible, this function may not be

used.

●Refer to http://www.lexus.com/ to find

approved Bluetooth® phones for this sys-

tem.

USING THE PHONE SWITCH

By pressing the phone switch, a call can

be received or ended without taking

your hands off the steering wheel.

148

1. PHONE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

Volume control switch

-Press the “+” side to increase the volume.

-Press the “-” side to decrease the volume.

Back switch

-Press the back switch to return to the previ-

ous screen.

INFORMATION

●The other party’s voice will be heard from

the front speakers. The audio/video sys-

tem will be muted during phone calls or

when hands-free voice commands are

used.

●Talk alternately with the other party on

the phone. If both parties speak at the

same time, the other party may not hear

what has been said. (This is not a malfunc-

tion.)

●Keep call volume down. Otherwise, the

other party’s voice may be audible out-

side the vehicle and voice echo may

increase. When talking on the phone,

speak clearly towards the microphone.

●The other party may not hear you clearly

when:

• Driving on an unpaved road. (Making

excessive traffic noise.)

• Driving at high speeds.

• The roof or windows are open.

• The air conditioning vents are pointed

towards the microphone.

• The sound of the air-conditioning fan is

loud.

•There is a negative effect on sound

quality due to the phone and/or network

being used.

USING THE STEERING

SWITCHES

149

1. PHONE OPERATION

PHONE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

-The following data is stored for every regis-

tered phone. When another phone is con-

nected, the following registered data

cannot be read:

•Phonebook data

• Call history data

• Speed dial data

•Image data

• All phone settings

• Message settings

-The following data in the system can be ini-

tialized:

• Phonebook data

•Call history data

• Speed dial data

• Image data

• All phone settings

• Message settings

ABOUT THE PHONEBOOK IN

THIS SYSTEM

INFORMATION

●When a phone’s registration is deleted,

the above-mentioned data is also

deleted.

WHEN SELLING OR

DISPOSING OF THE VEHICLE

A lot of personal data is registered when

the hands-free system is used. When

selling or disposing of the vehicle, initial-

ize the data. (See “DELETING PER-

SONAL DATA” on page 61.)

INFORMATION

●Once initialized, the data and settings will

be erased. Pay much attention when ini-

tializing the data.

150

1. PHONE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

U.S.A. Canada

-FCC ID : BABFT0033A

-This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

CAUTION

●FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

●CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation

Exposure

This equipment complies with FCC

radiation exposure limits set forth for

uncontrolled equipment and meets the

FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure

Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.

This equipment has very low levels of RF

energy that it deemed to comply without

maximum permissive exposure

evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it

should be installed and operated with at

least 20 cm and more between the

radiator and person’s body (excluding

extremities: hands, wrists, feet and

ankles).

●Co-location: This transmitter must not be

co-located or operated in conjunction

with any other antenna or transmitter.

-IC: 2024B-FT0033A

-This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS

standard(s). Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) this device

may not cause interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

-Le présent appareil est conforme aux

CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables

aux appareils radio exempts de licence.

L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux

conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit

pas produire de brouillage, et (2)

l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,

même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en

compromettre le fonctionnement.

151

1. PHONE OPERATION

PHONE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

CAUTION

●CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation

Exposure

This equipment complies with IC

radiation exposure limits set forth for

uncontrolled equipment and meets RSS-

102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)

Exposure rules. This equipment has very

low levels of RF energy that it deemed to

comply without maximum permissive

exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is

desirable that it should be installed and

operated with at least 20 cm and more

between the radiator and person’s body

(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet

and ankles).

●ATTENTION : Exposition aux radiations

des fréquences radioélectriques

Cet équipement se conforme aux limites

d’exposition aux radiations établies par

Industrie Canada pour un environnement

non contrôlé ainsi qu’aux directives

d’exposition aux fréquences

radioélectriques (RF) émises par

Industrie Canada dans la norme

CNR-102. Cet équipement émet un

niveau d’énergie RF faible à un point tel

qu’il se conforme sans devoir effectuer

d’évaluation d’exposition maximum

admissible (MPE). Lorsque l’équipement

est installé et utilisé, il est toutefois

souhaitable de laisser au moins 20 cm

entre l’antenne et le corps (à l’exception

des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et

chevilles).

●This Category II radiocommunication

device complies with Industry Canada

Standard RSS-310.

●Ce dispositif de radiocommunication de

catégorie II respecte la norme CNR-310

d’Industrie Canada.

152

1. PHONE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

3. REGISTER A Bluetooth® PHONE

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Phone”.

-The “Phone” screen can be displayed by

pressing on the steering wheel.

3Select “Yes” to register a phone.

-If 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been

registered, a registered device needs to be

deleted. See “When 5 Bluetooth® devices

have already been registered” on page

153.

4When this screen is displayed, operate

the Bluetooth® device.

-Search for the navigation system displayed

on the system’s screen using your

Bluetooth® device, and register the

Bluetooth® device.

For details about operating the Bluetooth®

device, see the manual that comes with it.

-A passcode is not required for SSP (Secure

Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth®

phones. Depending on the type of

Bluetooth® phone being connected, a

message confirming registration may be

displayed on the Bluetooth® phone’s

screen. Respond and operate the

Bluetooth® phone according to the confir-

mation message.

To use the hands-free system, it is neces-

sary to register a phone with the system.

Once the phone has been registered, it

is possible to make a hands-free call.

If a Bluetooth® phone has not been reg-

istered yet, it is necessary to register it

first according to the following proce-

dure. A Bluetooth® phone cannot be

registered while driving.

-See “REGISTERING A Bluetooth®

DEVICE” on page 195 of additional reg-

istration when registering.

153

1. PHONE OPERATION

PHONE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

-To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”.

-If the Bluetooth® phone to be registered

has a Bluetooth® audio function, this can

be registered at the same time.

5This screen will be displayed when reg-

istration is complete.

-When using the same phone, it is not nec-

essary to register it again.

When this screen is displayed, follow the

guidance on the screen to try again.

When another Bluetooth® device is con-

nected

-When another Bluetooth® device is cur-

rently connected, this screen is displayed.

-To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,

select “Yes”.

When 5 Bluetooth® devices have al-

ready been registered

1When 5 Bluetooth® devices have al-

ready been registered, a registered de-

vice needs to be deleted. Select “Yes” to

delete 1 or more.

2Select the device to be deleted, then se-

lect “Remove”.

3Select “Yes”.

If the Bluetooth® phone has a

Bluetooth® audio function

-When the Bluetooth® phone to be regis-

tered has a Bluetooth® audio function, this

audio function will be registered automati-

cally at the same time and this screen may

be displayed. If this screen is displayed,

select “Yes” to connect the audio function

or select “No” to cancel the connection.

154

1. PHONE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

-For automatic connection, see “CHANG-

ING “Bluetooth* Power”” on page 202.

-When the “START STOP ENGINE”

<“POWER”> switch is in ACCESSORY or

IGNITION ON <ON> mode, the system

searches for a nearby registered cellular

phone.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

-The system will connect with the phone that

was last connected, if it is nearby.

When “Display Phone Status” is set to

“On”, the connection status is displayed.

(See “Bluetooth® DEVICE CONNEC-

TION STATUS DISPLAY SETTINGS” on

page 204.)

-This screen appears when the Bluetooth®

phone is first connected after the “START

STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in

ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON>

mode.

CONNECTING A Bluetooth®

PHONE

AUTOMATICALLY

When a phone is registered, auto con-

nection is turned on. Always set it to this

mode and leave the Bluetooth® phone

in a location where connection can be

established.

INFORMATION

●It may take time if the phone connection

is carried out during Bluetooth® device

playback.

Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone being connected, it may be neces-

sary to perform additional steps on the

phone.

155

1. PHONE OPERATION

PHONE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.

-The “Phone” screen can be displayed by

pressing on the steering wheel.

2Select “Connect Phone”.

3Select the screen button corresponding

to the desired phone connection.

-When the cellular phone’s device name has

not been able to be obtained, “Device 1” to

“Device 5” will be displayed in the order the

phones were registered.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

4This screen is displayed.

5When the connection is completed, this

screen is displayed.

-Now you can use the Bluetooth® phone.

When a phone is connected while

Bluetooth® audio is playing

-This screen is displayed, and the

Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily.

MANUALLY

When the auto connection has failed or

“Bluetooth* Power” is turned off, it is

necessary to connect Bluetooth® man-

ually.

156

1. PHONE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

-If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnected on

purpose, such as turning it off, this does not

happen. Reconnect the Bluetooth® phone

manually.

RECONNECTING THE

Bluetooth® PHONE

If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnected

due to poor reception from the

Bluetooth® network when the “START

STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is

in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON

<ON> mode, the system automatically

reconnects the Bluetooth® phone.

When “Display Phone Status” is set to

“On”, the connection status is displayed.

157

1. PHONE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

PHONE

4. CALL ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Phone” on the “Menu” screen.

-The “Phone” screen can be displayed by

pressing on the steering wheel.

3Select the desired keys to input the

phone number.

-Each time is selected, an input digit is

deleted.

4Select or press the switch on

the steering wheel.

-Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone being connected, it may be neces-

sary to perform additional steps on the

phone.

1Select “Contacts”.

2Select the desired data from the list.

After a Bluetooth® phone has been reg-

istered, a call can be made using the

hands-free system. There are 7 methods

by which a call can be made. These are

described below.

BY DIAL

A call can be made by inputting the

phone number.

This cannot be operated while driving.

BY PHONEBOOK

Calls can be made by using the phone-

book data which is transferred from the

registered cellular phone.

The phonebook changes depending on

the phone connected. Up to 1000 con-

tacts (maximum of 3 numbers per con-

tact) can be registered in each

phonebook.

This cannot be operated while driving.

158

1. PHONE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

3Select the desired number from the list.

4Select or press the switch on

the steering wheel.

1Select “Contacts”.

2Select “Yes” or “Transfer” to automati-

cally transfer the phonebook from the

connected phone.

-Select “Manual” to transfer the phonebook

manually. (See “TRANSFERRING A

PHONE NUMBER” on page 175.)

-Select “No” or “Cancel” to cancel transfer-

ring.

-If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor

OPP compatible, the phonebook cannot

be transferred.

PBAP compatible models

PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible

models

3Transfer the phonebook data to the sys-

tem using the Bluetooth® phone.

-Depending on the type of cellular phone,

OBEX authentication may be required

when transferring phonebook data. Enter

“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.

-This screen appears while transferring. To

cancel this function, select “Cancel”.

WHEN THE PHONEBOOK IS

EMPTY

159

1. PHONE OPERATION

PHONE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

4When the data transfer from a PBAP in-

compatible but OPP compatible model

is complete, “Done” will appear on the

screen. Select “Done”.

1Select “Speed Dials”.

2Select the desired number to call.

-The list to be displayed can be changed by

selecting the “Speed Dial 1”, “Speed Dial

2” or “Speed Dial 3” tab.

INFORMATION

●Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone:

• It may be necessary to perform addi-

tional steps on the phone when transfer-

ring phonebook data.

• The registered image on the phone-

book may not appear when phonebook

data is transferred.

BY SPEED DIAL

Calls can be made using registered

phone numbers which can be selected

from a phonebook. (See “REGISTER-

ING THE SPEED DIAL” on page 183

for registering the speed dial.)

This can be operated while driving.

160

1. PHONE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Select “Call History”.

2Select the desired data from the list.

-The list to be displayed can be changed by

selecting the “All”, “Missed”, “Incoming” or

“Outgoing” tab.

3Select or press the switch on

the steering wheel.

BY CALL HISTORY

CALLS CAN BE MADE BY

CALL HISTORY WHICH HAS 4

FUNCTIONS

All: all calls (missed, incoming or outgo-

ing)

Up to 25 call history items can be select-

ed from the “A l l ” tab while driving.

Missed: calls that were missed

Incoming: calls that were received

Outgoing: calls that were made

161

1. PHONE OPERATION

PHONE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.

-The “Phone” screen can be displayed by

pressing on the steering wheel.

2Press the switch on the steering

wheel to display the “Call History”

screen.

3Press the switch on the steering

wheel to select the latest history item.

4Select or press the switch on

the steering wheel to call the latest his-

tory item.

-When making a call by phonebook, the

name (if registered) is displayed.

-When making a call to the same number

continuously, only the most recent call is

listed in call history.

-When a phone number registered in the

phonebook is received, the name and the

number are displayed.

-Number-withheld calls are also memorized

in the system.

-International phone calls may not be made

depending on the type of cellular phone

you have.

CALLS CAN BE MADE USING

THE LATEST CALL HISTORY

ITEM

BY VOICE RECOGNITION

Calls can be made by giving a voice

command. (For the operation and com-

mand of voice recognition, see “VOICE

COMMAND SYSTEM” on page 308.)

This can be operated while driving.

162

1. PHONE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the talk switch.

-“Call <name> <type>” is displayed in the

“Shortcut Menu” screen.

-When “Call <name> <type>” on the “Short-

cut Menu” screen is dimmed, the phone-

book’s voice command recognition cannot

be used. Check the Bluetooth® connec-

tion and if the contacts have been trans-

ferred to the navigation system.

2Say the name, or the name and type of

phone, of a registered contact.

-In the same manner as it is displayed on the

screen, “Call <name> <type>”, after saying

“Call” say the name, or the name and type

of phone, of a contact.

For example: “Call”, “John Smith” or “Call”,

“Mary Davis”, “Mobile”

-There are 4 types of phones: Home,

Mobile, Office and Other.

-Short or abbreviated names in the phone-

book may not be recognized. Change

names in the phonebook to full names.

-Sometimes a voice recognition result con-

firmation screen will be displayed. After

confirming the result, say “Yes” or “No”.

-When the system recognizes multiple

names from the phonebook, a name candi-

date list will be displayed on the screen. If

the desired name is not displayed on the

top of the screen, say the number of the

name from the candidate list (number 1 and

number 2) to select a name from the candi-

date list.

-When a contact has multiple phone num-

bers registered in the phonebook, a candi-

date list will be displayed. If the desired

phone number is not displayed on the top

of the screen, say the number of the desired

phone number from the candidate list

(number 1 and number 2) to select a phone

number from the candidate list.

3Say “Dial” to call the phone number.

1Press the talk switch.

-“Dial <number>” is displayed in the “Short-

cut Menu” screen.

-When “Dial <number>” on the “Shortcut

Menu” screen is dimmed, the phone num-

ber voice recognition cannot be used.

Check the Bluetooth® phone connection.

2Say the phone number.

-In the same manner as it is displayed on the

screen, “Dial <number>”, after saying “Dial”

say the phone number.

-Say the phone number one digit at a time.

For example, if the phone number is

2345678:

Say “two three four five six seven eight”

Do not say “twenty three forty five sixty

seven eight”

VOICE COMMAND

EXAMPLE: CALL NAME

VOICE COMMAND

EXAMPLE: DIAL NUMBER

163

1. PHONE OPERATION

PHONE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

-The system can recognize the following

types of phone numbers:

3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611)

7 digit numbers (Local phone numbers)

10 digit numbers (Area code + Local

phone number)

11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area code +

Local phone number)

-As the system cannot recognize additional

numbers, say the complete number without

stopping.

-When the system recognizes multiple

phone numbers, a phone number candi-

date list will be displayed on the screen. If

the desired phone number is not displayed

on the top of the screen, say the number of

the desired phone number from the candi-

date list (number 1 and number 2) to select

a phone number from the candidate list.

3Say “Dial” to call the phone number.

■INTERNATIONAL CALL

1Go to the “Main Menu” screen by

pressing the talk switch on the steering

wheel and saying “Main menu” or select

“Main Menu”.

2Say “Use a phone”.

3Say “International call”.

-Up to 24 digits can be recognized when

using the international call function. The

number can also be divided into multiple

groups and recognized.

To dial a phone number that is not a 3, 7,

10 or 11 digit number, for example an in-

ternational number, use “International

Call”.

Calling without the voice recognition:

After the desired phone number is dis-

played, a call can also made by pressing

the switch on the steering wheel.

Canceling the voice recognition: The

voice recognition will be canceled when

either of the following is performed:

• Press and hold the talk switch.

• Select “Cancel”.

164

1. PHONE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Select “Messages”.

-When “Message Transfer” is set to “Off”, a

confirmation screen will be displayed.

Select “Yes”. (See page 187.)

2Select the “SMS/MMS” tab and then

select the desired received message

from the list.

-The tab display may vary depending on the

type of cellular phone.

3Select or press the switch on

the steering wheel.

CALLING USING AN SMS/

MMS MESSAGE

Calls can be made to an SMS (Short

Message Service)/MMS (Multimedia

Messaging Service) message sender’s

phone number.

This can be operated while driving.

BY POI CALL

A call can be made by selecting

when it is displayed on the screen from

the navigation system. (See “TO SEE

INFORMATION ABOUT THE ICON

WHERE THE CURSOR IS SET” on

page 42 and “VIEW DETAILED FUEL

PRICE INFORMATION” on page

333.)

165

1. PHONE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

PHONE

5. RECEIVE ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE

1Select or press the switch on

the steering wheel to talk on the phone.

When a call is received, this screen is

displayed with a sound.

To refuse to receive the call: Select

or press the switch on the

steering wheel.

To adjust the volume of a received call:

Select “-” or “+”, turn the “PWR·VOL”

knob, or use the volume switch on the

steering wheel.

INFORMATION

●During international phone calls, the

other party’s name or number may not be

displayed correctly depending on the

type of cellular phone you have.

●The incoming call display mode can be

set. (See “INCOMING CALL DIS-

PLAY” on page 192.)

166

1. PHONE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

6. TALK ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE

1Select the desired number to input the

key.

While talking on the phone, this screen is

displayed. The operations outlined be-

low can be performed on this screen.

To adjust the volume of the other party’s

voice: Select “-” or “+”, turn the

“PWR·VOL” knob, or use the volume

switch on the steering wheel.

To hang up the phone: Select or

press the switch on the steering

wheel.

To mute your voice: Select “Mute”.

To i np u t a ke y : Select “0-9”.

To transfer the call: Select “Handset

Mode” to change from hands-free call to

cellular phone call. Select “Handsfree

Mode” to change from cellular phone call

to hands-free call.

INFORMATION

●Changing from hands-free call to cellular

phone call is not possible while driving.

●When cellular phone call is changed to

hands-free call, the hands-free screen will

be displayed and its functions can be

operated on the screen.

●Changing between cellular phone call

and hands-free call can be performed by

operating the cellular phone directly.

●Transferring methods and operations will

be different depending on the type of cel-

lular phone you have.

●For the operation of the cellular phone,

see the manual that comes with it.

WHEN YOU SELECT “0-9”

INPUTTING A KEY

Inputting a key is not possible while driv-

ing.

To hang up the phone: Select or

press the switch on the steering

wheel.

167

1. PHONE OPERATION

PHONE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Confirm the number displayed on the

screen and select “Send”. The number

before marked sign will be sent.

-When “Clear” is selected, this function is

finished and the normal tone screen

appears.

TONE SIGNAL

If a continuous tone signal is registered

in a phonebook, this screen appears. (If

not registered, “Send” and “Clear” are

not displayed.) This can be operated

while driving.

To hang up the phone: Select or

press the switch on the steering

wheel.

INFORMATION

●The continuous tone signal is the marked

sign (p or w) and the number that follows

the phone number. (e.g.

056133w0123p#1)

●When the “p” pause tone is used, after

waiting 2 seconds the tone data up until

the next pause tone will be automatically

sent. When the “w” pause tone is used,

the tone data up until the next pause tone

will be automatically sent after user oper-

ation.

●This operation can be done when it is

desirable to operate an answering

machine or use a telephone service in a

bank for example. The phone number

and the code number in the phonebook

can be registered.

BY VOICE RECOGNITION

“Send Tones” can be operated by giving

a command during a call.

-The operating procedure is similar to

other voice recognition operations. (For

the operation of voice recognition, see

“VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM” on

page 308.)

168

1. PHONE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Select or press the switch

on the steering wheel to start talking

with the other party.

INCOMING CALL WAITING

When a call is interrupted by a third par-

ty while talking, this screen is displayed.

-Select or press the switch

on the steering wheel to refuse the call.

-Each time is selected or the

switch on the steering wheel is pressed

during an interrupted call, the party who

is on hold will be switched.

INFORMATION

●If your cellular phone does not support

HFP Ver. 1.5, this function cannot be used.

●The ring tone that has been set in the

“Phone Sound Settings” screen sounds

when there is an incoming call. Depend-

ing on the type of Bluetooth® phone,

both the navigation system and

Bluetooth® phone may sound simulta-

neously when there is an incoming call.

(See “RING TONE SETTING” on page

173.)

169

1. PHONE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

PHONE

7. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Phone” on the “Menu” screen.

-The “Phone” screen can be displayed by

pressing on the steering wheel.

3Select “Messages”.

-Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone being connected, it may be neces-

sary to perform additional steps on the

phone.

-When “Message Transfer” is set to “Off”, a

confirmation screen will be displayed.

Select “Yes”. (See page 187.)

4Select the screen button corresponding

to the desired message.

-Messages are displayed in the appropriate

connected Bluetooth® phone’s registered

mail address folder. Select the tab of the

desired folder to be displayed.

5Messages can be checked.

-Selecting “Previous” or “Next” displays the

previous or next message.

-Only received messages on the connected

Bluetooth® phone can be displayed.

-The text of the message is not displayed

while driving.

Received messages can be forwarded

from the connected Bluetooth® phone,

enabling checking and replying using

the navigation system (Quick reply).

CHECKING MESSAGES

170

1. PHONE OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

6Select “Play” to start reading out of the

message. Select “Stop” to stop the func-

tion.

-Select “-” or “+”, turn the “PWR·VOL”

knob, or use the volume switch on the

steering wheel to adjust the message read

out volume.

-The message read out function is available

even while driving.

1Select “Reply”.

2Select the screen button corresponding

to the desired message.

3Select “Send”.

-While the message is being sent, a sending

message screen is displayed.

4This screen will be displayed if message

delivery fails.

-Select “Retry” to attempt to send the mes-

sage again or select “Cancel” to cancel.

-When the received message is an e-mail

and “Update Message Read Status on

Phone” is set to “On”, “Mark as Unread”

or “Mark as Read” can be selected.

Select “Mark as Unread” to mark mails

that have been read on the Bluetooth

phone as unread. Conversely, select

“Mark as Read” to mark mails that have

not been read on the Bluetooth® phone

as read. (See “MESSAGE SETTINGS”

on page 187.)

-For SMS/MMS, selecting or

pressing the switch on the steering

wheel calls the sender. (See page 164.)

-Select “Reply” to reply to the message.

(See page 170.)

REPLYING (QUICK REPLY)

171

1. PHONE OPERATION

PHONE

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Reply messages can be edited while the

vehicle is parked. Select “Edit”.

2Select the screen button corresponding

to the desired message.

3Select “OK” when editing is completed.

4Select .

1Select “Read” to check the message.

-The “Messages” screen will be displayed.

-When “Automatic Message Readout” is

set to “On”, the message will be automati-

cally read out. (See “MESSAGE SET-

TINGS” on page 187.)

EDITING REPLY MESSAGES NEW MESSAGE

NOTIFICATION

If “New Message Pop-up” and “New

Message Voice Notification” are set to

“On”, a notification appears on the

screen and a voice notification will be

heard when a new message arrives.

(See “MESSAGE SETTINGS” on page

187.)

-For SMS/MMS, selecting or

pressing the switch on the steering

wheel calls the sender. (See page 164.)

-To check the message later, select

“Ignore” or .

172

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

2. SETUP

1. PHONE SETTINGS

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Setup”.

3Select “Phone”.

4Perform each setting according to the

procedures outlined on the following

pages.

1Select “Phone Sound Settings”.

2Perform each setting according to the

procedures outlined on the following

pages.

3When all settings are completed, select

“Save”.

The phonebook can be edited. Volume,

display and message settings can also

be changed.

PHONE SOUND SETTINGS

The call and ring tone volume can be ad-

justed. A ring tone can be selected.

173

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

PHONE

1Select “Call Volume” on the “Phone

Sound Settings” screen.

2Select “-” or “+” to adjust the call vol-

ume.

3Select “OK”.

1Select “Ring Tone Volume” on the

“Phone Sound Settings” screen.

2Select “-” or “+” to adjust the ring tone

volume.

3Select “OK”.

1Select “Ring Tone” on the “Phone

Sound Settings” screen.

2Select the screen button corresponding

to the desired ring tone.

-Ring tones can be heard by selecting the

screen buttons.

3Select “OK”.

1Select “Default” on the “Phone Sound

Settings” screen.

2Select “Yes”.

INFORMATION

●The system will automatically increase

the volume when the speed exceeds 50

mph (80 km/h).

CALL VOLUME SETTING

RING TONE VOLUME

SETTING

RING TONE SETTING

INITIALIZING THE SETTINGS

The settings can be initialized.

174

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

3Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.

4Select “Phonebook”.

5Perform each setting according to the

procedures outlined on the following

pages.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select “Phonebook” on the “Phone Set-

tings” screen.

4Select “Manage Contacts”.

5Perform each setting according to the

procedures outlined on the following

pages.

PHONEBOOK

The call history can be deleted and

phonebook and speed dial settings can

be changed.

INFORMATION

●Phonebook data is managed indepen-

dently for every registered phone. When

one phone is connected, another phone’s

registered data cannot be read.

SETTING THE PHONEBOOK

The phonebook can be transferred from

a Bluetooth® phone to the system. The

phonebook also can be added, edited

and deleted.

175

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

PHONE

■THE “Contacts” SCREEN CAN

ALSO BE DISPLAYED

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.

-The “Phone” screen can be displayed by

pressing on the steering wheel.

2Select “Contacts” on the “Phone”

screen.

3Select “Options”.

4Select “Manage Contacts”.

■TRANSFERRING A PHONE NUM-

BER

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth®

phones

1Select “Transfer Contacts”.

2Select “Update Contacts”.

The phone numbers in a Bluetooth®

phone can be transferred to the system.

The system can manage up to 5 phone-

books. Up to 1000 contacts (maximum

of 3 numbers per contact) can be regis-

tered in each phonebook.

Operation methods differ between

PBAP compatible and PBAP incompat-

ible but OPP compatible Bluetooth®

phones.

If your cellular phone is neither PBAP

nor OPP compatible, the phonebook

cannot be transferred.

176

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

3Transfer the phonebook data to the sys-

tem using the Bluetooth® phone.

-This operation may be unnecessary

depending on the cellular phone model.

-Depending on the type of cellular phone,

OBEX authentication may be required

when transferring phonebook data. Enter

“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.

-This screen appears while transferring. To

cancel this function, select “Cancel”.

-If another Bluetooth® device is connected

when transferring phonebook data,

depending on the phone, the connected

Bluetooth® device may need to be discon-

nected.

PBAP compatible models automatic

data transfer setting

1Select “Transfer Contacts”.

2Select “Automatically Download Con-

tacts” to transfer the phonebook from a

connected cellular phone.

Select “Automatically Download Call

History” to transfer the call history from

a connected cellular phone.

3Select “On”.

4Select “Save”.

When a PBAP compatible phone is con-

nected, the phone’s phonebook data can

be automatically transferred.

177

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

PHONE

For PBAP incompatible but OPP com-

patible Bluetooth® phones

1Select “Transfer Contacts”.

2Select “Replace Contacts” or “A d d

Contacts”.

-If the phonebook contains phonebook

data, this screen is displayed.

3Transfer the phonebook data to the sys-

tem using a Bluetooth® phone.

-Depending on the type of cellular phone,

OBEX authentication may be required

when transferring phonebook data. Enter

“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.

-This screen appears while transferring. To

cancel this function, select “Cancel”. If

“Add Contacts” is selected and there is an

interruption during the transfer of data, the

phonebook data transferred until then will

be stored in the system. This is not the case

when “Cancel” is selected.

4When the transfer is complete, “Done”

will appear on the screen. Select

“Done”.

When another Bluetooth® device is con-

nected

-When another Bluetooth® device is cur-

rently connected, this screen is displayed.

-To disconnect it, select “Yes”.

INFORMATION

●Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone, the registered image on the

phonebook may not appear when

phonebook data is transferred.

178

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

From “Contacts” screen

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.

-The “Phone” screen can be displayed by

pressing on the steering wheel.

2Select “Contacts” on the “Phone”

screen.

3Select “Transfer”.

4This screen is displayed. The following

operations are performed in the same

manner as when they are performed

from the “Setup” screen.

■REGISTERING THE PHONE-

BOOK DATA

1Select “New Contact”.

2Use the software keyboard to input the

name and select “OK”.

3Input the phone number and select

“OK”.

-To use a tone signal after the phone num-

ber, input the tone signal too.

Phonebooks of PBAP incompatible but

OPP compatible phones can also be

transferred from the “Contacts” screen. The phonebook data can be registered.

Up to 3 numbers per person can be reg-

istered. New phonebook data cannot be

added for PBAP compatible

Bluetooth® phones.

179

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

PHONE

4Select the phone type.

5When 2 or less numbers in total are reg-

istered to this contact, this screen is dis-

played.

-To add a number to this contact, select

“Yes”.

■EDITING THE PHONEBOOK

DATA

1Select “Edit Contacts”.

2Select the desired data to edit.

3Select the desired name or number.

4Edit the name or the number. (See

“REGISTERING THE PHONEBOOK

DATA” on page 178.)

5Select “Save” when editing is complet-

ed.

The phone number can be registered in

“Phone # 1”, “Phone # 2” and “Phone #

3” separately. Phonebooks cannot be

edited for PBAP compatible

Bluetooth® phones via the navigation

system.

180

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

■THE “Edit Contact” SCREEN CAN

ALSO BE DISPLAYED

From the “Contact” screen

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.

-The “Phone” screen can be displayed by

pressing on the steering wheel.

2Select “Contacts” on the “Phone”

screen.

3Select the desired data from the list on

the “Contacts” screen.

4Select “Options”.

5Select “Edit”.

From the “Call History” screen

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.

-The “Phone” screen can be displayed by

pressing on the steering wheel.

2Select “Call History” on the “Phone”

screen.

3Select the desired number from the list

on the “Call History” screen.

4Select “Add to Contacts” or “Update

Contact”.

5If “Update Contact” has been selected,

this screen will be displayed. Select the

desired data from the list.

181

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

PHONE

■DELETING THE PHONEBOOK

DATA

1Select “Delete Contacts”.

2Select the desired data or “Select All”,

then select “Delete”.

-Multiple data can be selected and deleted

at the same time.

3Select “Yes”.

■ALTERNATIVE PHONEBOOK

DATA DELETION METHOD

PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible

models

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.

-The “Phone” screen can be displayed by

pressing on the steering wheel.

2Select “Contacts” on the “Phone”

screen.

3Select the desired data from the list on

the “Contacts” screen.

4Select “Options”.

5Select “Delete”.

6Select “Yes”.

The data can be deleted.

When selling or disposing of the vehicle,

delete all your data on the system.

For PBAP compatible phones, delete

the phonebook data after setting “A u t o -

matically Download Contacts” to

“Off”. (See “PBAP compatible models

automatic data transfer setting” on page

176.)

INFORMATION

●When a Bluetooth® phone is deleted, the

phonebook data will be deleted at the

same time.

182

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select “Phonebook” on the “Phone Set-

tings” screen.

4Select “Manage Speed Dials”.

5Perform each setting according to the

procedures outlined on the following

pages.

■THE “Speed Dials” SCREEN CAN

ALSO BE DISPLAYED

From the “Speed Dial” screen

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.

-The “Phone” screen can be displayed by

pressing on the steering wheel.

2Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone”

screen.

3Select “Options”.

From the “Contacts” screen

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.

-The “Phone” screen can be displayed by

pressing on the steering wheel.

2Select “Contacts” on the “Phone”

screen.

3Select “Options”.

SPEED DIALS SETTING

Speed dials can be registered and delet-

ed.

183

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

PHONE

4Select “Manage Speed Dials”.

■REGISTERING THE SPEED DIAL

1Select “New”.

2Select the desired data to be registered.

3Select the desired phone number.

4Select the desired speed dial location.

5If a location that is already in use is se-

lected, this screen will be displayed.

-Select “Yes” to replace it.

6When this screen is displayed, the oper-

ation is complete.

Speed dial numbers can be registered

by selecting the desired number from

the phonebook. Up to 18 numbers per

phone can be registered as a speed dial.

184

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

■THE SPEED DIAL CAN ALSO BE

REGISTERED

From the “Speed Dial” screen

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.

-The “Phone” screen can be displayed by

pressing on the steering wheel.

2Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone”

screen.

3Select “(add new)”.

4Select “Yes” to set new speed dial.

5Select the desired data to be registered.

6Select the desired phone number.

From the “Contact” screen

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.

-The “Phone” screen can be displayed by

pressing on the steering wheel.

2Select “Contacts” on the “Phone”

screen.

3Select the desired data from the list on

the “Contacts” screen.

4Select “Options”.

5Select “Set Speed Dial”.

185

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

PHONE

6This screen is displayed.

-The following operations are performed in

the same manner as when they are per-

formed from the “Setup” screen.

■DELETING THE SPEED DIAL

1Select “Delete”.

2Select the desired data, or to delete all

the data select “Select All”, then select

“Delete”.

-Multiple data can be selected and deleted

at the same time.

3Select “Yes”.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select “Phonebook” on the “Phone Set-

tings” screen.

4Select “Delete Call History”.

5Select the desired history to be deleted.

The speed dial can be deleted.

DELETING CALL HISTORY

The call history can be deleted.

For PBAP compatible phones, delete

the call history after setting “A u t o m a t i -

cally Download Call History” to “Off”.

(See “PBAP compatible models auto-

matic data transfer setting” on page

176.)

186

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

6Select the desired data, or to delete all

the data select “Select All”, then select

“Delete”.

-Multiple data can be selected and deleted

at the same time.

7Select “Yes”.

■THE CALL HISTORY CAN ALSO

BE DELETED

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.

-The “Phone” screen can be displayed by

pressing on the steering wheel.

2Select “Call History” on the “Phone”

screen.

3Select “Delete”.

4This screen is displayed.

-The following operations are performed in

the same manner as when they are per-

formed from the “Setup” screen.

-Other call history can be operated simi-

larly.

Deleting after call history has been dis-

played

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.

-The “Phone” screen can be displayed by

pressing on the steering wheel.

2Select “Call History” on the “Phone”

screen.

3Select the desired history to be deleted.

187

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

PHONE

4Select “Delete”.

5Select “Yes”.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

3Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.

4Select “Messaging Settings”.

5Perform each setting according to the

procedures outlined on the following

pages.

6Select “Save” when each setting is com-

pleted.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.

-The “Phone” screen can be displayed by

pressing on the steering wheel.

2Select “Messages” on the “Phone”

screen.

3Select “Options”.

MESSAGE SETTINGS

Message settings can be changed. THE “Messaging Settings”

SCREEN CAN ALSO BE

DISPLAYED

188

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

-On this screen, the following functions can

be operated:

-To reset all setup items, select “Default”.

SCREEN FOR “Messaging

Settings”

No.

Function

Select to set message forwarding

from cellular phones to “On” or “Off”.

Select to set the new message notifi-

cation display to “On” or “Off”.

Select to set the new message voice

notification to “On” or “Off”.

Select to adjust the new message noti-

fication volume. (See “NEW MES-

SAGE NOTIFICATION VOLUME

SETTINGS” on page 189.)

Select a new message voice notifica-

tion tone. (See “NEW MESSAGE

NOTIFICATION TONE SET-

TINGS” on page 189.)

Select to set the automatic message

read out function to “On” or “Off”.

Select to adjust the message read out

volume. (See “MESSAGE READ

OUT VOLUME SETTINGS” on page

190.)

Select to set the cellular phone’s mes-

sage read and unread status update

function to “On” or “Off”.

Select to edit quick reply messages.

(See “EDIT QUICK REPLY MES-

SAGES” on page 190.)

INFORMATION

●Depending on the phone, these functions

may not be available.

No.

Function

189

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

PHONE

1Select “New Message Notification

Volume”.

2Select “-” or “+” to adjust the new mes-

sage notification volume.

3Select “OK”.

1Select “New Message Notification

To n e ” .

2Select the desired new message notifi-

cation tone.

-New message notification tones can be

heard by selecting the screen buttons.

3Select “OK”.

NEW MESSAGE

NOTIFICATION VOLUME

SETTINGS

The new message notification volume

can be adjusted.

INFORMATION

●The system will automatically increase

the volume when the speed exceeds 50

mph (80 km/h).

NEW MESSAGE

NOTIFICATION TONE

SETTINGS

A new message voice notification tone

can be selected.

190

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Select “Message Readout Volume”.

2Select “-” or “+” to adjust the message

read out volume.

3Select “OK”.

1Select “Edit Quick Reply Messages”.

2Select the screen button corresponding

to the desired message.

3Use the software keyboard to edit the

message.

4Select “OK”.

MESSAGE READ OUT

VOLUME SETTINGS

Message read out volume can be ad-

justed.

INFORMATION

●The system will automatically increase

the volume when the speed exceeds 50

mph (80 km/h).

EDIT QUICK REPLY

MESSAGES

Quick reply messages can be edited. 15

messages have already been stored.

191

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

PHONE

1Select “Default”.

2Select “Yes”.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

3Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.

4Select “Phone Display Settings”.

5Perform each setting according to the

procedures outlined on the following

pages.

6When each setting is completed, select

“Save”.

INITIALIZING THE SETTINGS

The settings can be initialized.

PHONE DISPLAY SETTINGS

The phone display settings can be

changed.

192

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

-On this screen, the following functions can

be operated:

-To reset all setup items, select “Default”.

1Select “Incoming Call Display Mode”.

SCREEN FOR “Phone Display

Settings”

No. Function

Select to change the incoming call

display. (See “INCOMING CALL

DISPLAY” on page 192.)

For PBAP compatible models, se-

lect to set the display of the automat-

ic phonebook transfer completion

message to “On” or “Off”.

For PBAP compatible models, se-

lect to set the display of the automat-

ic call history transfer completion

message to “On” or “Off”.

For PBAP compatible models, se-

lect to set the display of images dur-

ing calls to “On” or “Off”.

For PBAP compatible models, se-

lect to set the orientation of images

displayed during calls. (See “RO-

TATING CONTACT IMAGES” on

page 193.)

INFORMATION

●Depending on the phone, these functions

may not be available even if the phone is

PBAP compatible.

INCOMING CALL DISPLAY

The type of incoming call display can be

selected.

193

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

PHONE

2Select “Full Screen” or “Drop Down”.

3Select “Save”.

1Select “Rotate Contact Images”.

2Select the desired orientation of the im-

age to be displayed.

3Select “Save”.

1Select “Default”.

2Select “Yes”.

Screen button Function

“Full Screen”

When a call is received,

the hands-free screen is

displayed and it can be

operated on the screen.

“Drop Down”

The message is displayed

on the upper side of the

screen and it can only be

operated via the steering

wheel switches.

ROTATING CONTACT

IMAGES

For PBAP compatible models, when

“Contact Image for Incoming Calls” is

set to “On”, images stored together with

phone numbers in the cellular phone’s

phonebook will be transferred and dis-

played during the incoming call. The ori-

entation of the image can be set.

INITIALIZING THE SETTINGS

The settings can be initialized.

194

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Setup”.

3Select “Bluetooth*”.

4Perform each setting according to the

procedures outlined on the following

pages.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

3Select “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”

screen.

4Select “Registered Devices”.

5Perform each setting according to the

procedures outlined on the following

pages.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

A Bluetooth® device can be set up. REGISTERED DEVICES

A Bluetooth® device can be registered,

deleted or set up.

195

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

PHONE

1Select “A d d N e w ” to register a

Bluetooth® device to the system.

-If 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been

registered, a registered device needs to be

deleted. See “When 5 Bluetooth® devices

have already been registered” on page

196.

2When this screen is displayed, operate

the Bluetooth® device.

-Search for the navigation system displayed

on the system’s screen using your

Bluetooth® device, and register the

Bluetooth® device.

For details about operating the Bluetooth®

device, see the manual that comes with it.

-A passcode is not required for SSP (Secure

Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth®

devices. Depending on the type of

Bluetooth® phone being connected, a

message confirming registration may be

displayed on the Bluetooth® phone’s

screen. Respond and operate the

Bluetooth® phone according to the confir-

mation message.

-To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”.

3When the connection is completed, this

screen is displayed.

-When using the same device, it is not nec-

essary to register it again.

REGISTERING A Bluetooth®

DEVICE

Bluetooth® devices compatible with

phones (HFP) and portable players

(AVP) can be registered simultaneous-

ly. Phones (HFP) and portable players

(AVP) (maximum of 5) can be regis-

tered.

196

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

-When this screen is displayed, follow the

guidance on the screen to try again.

-When another Bluetooth® device is cur-

rently connected, this screen is displayed.

-To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,

select “Yes”.

When 5 Bluetooth® devices have al-

ready been registered

1When 5 Bluetooth® devices have al-

ready been registered, a registered de-

vice needs to be deleted. Select “Yes” to

delete 1 or more.

2Select the device to be deleted, then se-

lect “Remove”.

3Select “Yes”.

1Select “Remove”.

2Select the desired device, or to delete

all the devices select “Select All”, then

select “Remove”.

-Multiple devices can be selected and

deleted at the same time.

3Select “Yes”.

DELETING A Bluetooth®

DEVICE

INFORMATION

●When deleting a Bluetooth® phone, the

phonebook data will be deleted at the

same time.

197

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

PHONE

“Device Name”: The name of the

Bluetooth® device which is displayed on

the screen. It can be changed to a desired

name.

• Even if the device name is changed, the

name registered in your Bluetooth®

device does not change.

“Device Address”: The device address is

unique to each device. It cannot be

changed.

• If 2 Bluetooth® devices have been regis-

tered with the same device name, the

devices can be distinguished referring to

the device’s address.

“My Phone Number”: The phone number of

the Bluetooth® phone is displayed on the

screen. Depending on the type of phone,

the phone number may not be displayed.

“Profiles”: The compatibility profile of the

Bluetooth® device is displayed on the

screen.

“Connect Portable Player from”: There are

2 portable player connection settings avail-

able; “Vehicle” and “Portable Player”.

■CHANGING A DEVICE NAME

1Select “Details”.

2Select the device to be edited.

3Select “Device Name”.

4Use the software keyboard to input the

device name and select “OK”.

5Confirm the device name and select

“OK”.

EDITING THE Bluetooth®

DEVICE

The Bluetooth® device’s information

can be displayed on the screen. The dis-

played information can also be edited.

198

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

■SETTING PORTABLE PLAYER

CONNECTION METHOD

1Select “Connect Portable Player

from”.

2Select the desired connection method.

“Vehicle”: Select to connect the audio sys-

tem to the portable player.

“Portable Player”: Select to connect the

portable player to the audio system.

-Depending on the portable player, the

“Vehicle” or “Portable Player” connection

method may be best. As such, refer to the

manual that comes with the portable player.

3Select “OK”.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

3Select “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”

screen.

4Select “Connect Phone”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

SELECTING A Bluetooth®

PHONE

If more than 1 Bluetooth® phone has

been registered, it is necessary to select

which phone to connect to.

It is possible to select from up to 5 regis-

tered Bluetooth® devices (Phones

(HFP) and portable players (AVP)

(maximum of 5) can be registered.)

Although up to 5 Bluetooth® phones

can be registered in the system, only 1

Bluetooth® phone can function at a

time.

199

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

PHONE

5Select the phone to be connected.

-The indicator of the selected Bluetooth®

phone will turn on.

6This screen is displayed.

7When the result message is displayed,

the Bluetooth® phone can be used.

When a phone is connected while

Bluetooth® audio is playing

-This screen is displayed, and the

Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily.

When another Bluetooth® device is con-

nected

-When another Bluetooth® device is cur-

rently connected, this screen is displayed.

To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,

select “Yes”.

-If the desired Bluetooth® phone is not on

the list, select “Add New” to register the

phone. (See page 195.)

-The currently connected Bluetooth®

phone’s screen button will have a

Bluetooth® mark displayed on it. If the

currently connected Bluetooth® phone’s

screen button is selected, the

Bluetooth® phone can be disconnected.

Select “Yes” to disconnect.

200

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

3Select “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”

screen.

4Select “Connect Portable Player”.

5Select the desired portable player to be

connected.

-The indicator of the selected portable

player will turn on.

6This screen is displayed.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

SELECTING PORTABLE

PLAYER

If more than 1 portable player has been

registered, it is necessary to select which

portable player to connect to.

It is possible to select from up to 5 regis-

tered Bluetooth® devices (Phones

(HFP) and portable players (AVP)

(maximum of 5) can be registered.)

Although up to 5 portable players can

be registered in the system, only 1 porta-

ble player can function at a time. -If the desired portable player is not on the

list, select “Add New” to register the por-

table player. (See page 195.)

-The currently connected portable

player’s screen button will have a

Bluetooth® mark displayed on it. If the

currently connected portable player’s

screen button is selected, the portable

player can be disconnected. Select “Yes”

to disconnect.

201

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

PHONE

7When the result message is displayed,

the portable player can be used.

When another Bluetooth® device is con-

nected

-When another Bluetooth® device is cur-

rently connected, this screen is displayed.

To disconnect it, select “Yes”.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

3Select “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”

screen.

4Select “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

DETAILED Bluetooth®

SETTINGS

The Bluetooth® settings can be con-

firmed and changed.

202

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

5This screen is displayed.

-The information displays the following

items:

-If it is desirable to change the settings, refer

to the following pages.

-When the settings have been changed,

select “Save”.

■CHANGING “Bluetooth* Power”

When “Bluetooth* Power” is “On”:

The Bluetooth® device is automatically

connected when the “START STOP EN-

GINE” <“POWER”> switch is in ACCES-

SORY or IGNITION ON <ON> mode.

When “Bluetooth* Power” is “Off”:

The Bluetooth® device is disconnected,

and the system will not connect to it next

time.

-The “Bluetooth* Power” auto connection

state can be set on or off.

•“On”: The auto connection is turned on.

•“Off”: The auto connection is turned off.

-The auto connection state cannot be

changed from “On” to “Off” while driving,

but it can be changed from “Off” to “On”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Screen button/

Screen item Information

“Device Name”

This name will be dis-

played on the device

when it is connected. It

can be changed to a de-

sired name.

“Passcode”

The password that was

set when the Bluetooth®

device was registered

can be changed.

Device

Address

The device address is

unique to each device. It

cannot be changed.

Profiles

The compatibility profile

of the Bluetooth® device

is displayed on the

screen. (See pages 146

and 264.)

CHANGING THE Bluetooth®

SETTINGS

The Bluetooth® settings can be

changed according to the following pro-

cedures.

The “Bluetooth* Power” display shows

the following state.

203

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

PHONE

1Select “Bluetooth* Power”.

2Select “On” or “Off”.

3Select “Save”.

-In the event the state of “Bluetooth*

Power” is changed from “Off” to “On”,

Bluetooth® connection will begin.

■EDITING THE DEVICE NAME

1Select “Device Name”.

2Use the software keyboard to input the

device name and select “OK”.

3Select “Save”.

■EDITING THE PASSCODE

1Select “Passcode”.

2Input a passcode and select “OK”.

3Select “Save”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

204

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

■Bluetooth® DEVICE CONNEC-

TION STATUS DISPLAY SETTINGS

1Select “Display Phone Status” or “Dis-

play Portable Player Status”.

2Select “On”.

3Select “Save”.

1Select “Default”.

2Select “Yes”.

-If the state of “Bluetooth* Power” is

changed from “Off” into “On”, Bluetooth®

connection will begin.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

When “Bluetooth* Power” is “On” and

the “START STOP ENGINE”

<“POWER”> switch is in ACCESSORY

or IGNITION ON <ON> mode, the

Bluetooth® phone and portable player’s

connection status can be displayed.

(See “CHANGING “Bluetooth*

Power”” on page 202.)

INITIALIZING THE Bluetooth®

SETTINGS

The settings can be initialized.

205

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

PHONE

206

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.04.18 16:48

1. QUICK REFERENCE........................... 208

2. SOME BASICS.......................................... 210

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM........................ 210

AUDIO SPLIT SCREEN DISPLAY ................. 210

TURNING THE SYSTEM

ON AND OFF ......................................................... 211

SWITCHING BETWEEN

FUNCTIONS ........................................................... 211

DSP CONTROL....................................................... 212

TONE AND BALANCE....................................... 213

SELECTING SCREEN SIZE .............................. 214

DVD PLAYER............................................................ 215

AUX PORT ................................................................. 216

USB PORT................................................................... 216

3. RADIO OPERATION............................. 217

LISTENING TO THE RADIO ............................ 217

PRESETTING A STATION ................................. 218

SELECTING A STATION ................................... 218

RADIO BROADCAST DATA

SYSTEM.................................................................... 219

TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT...................... 220

4. HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY

INFORMATION.................................... 221

USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY.......... 221

AVAILABLE HD Radio™

TECHNOLOGY................................................. 222

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE..................... 224

1AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

207

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.04.18 16:48

5. RADIO OPERATION

(XM Satellite Radio

BROADCAST)...................................... 226

HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO

AN XM Satellite Radio ...................................... 226

DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID ......................... 227

LISTENING TO SATELLITE RADIO ............ 227

CHANNEL CATEGORY ................................. 228

PRESETTING A CHANNEL............................ 228

SELECTING A CHANNEL.............................. 228

DISPLAYING THE TITLE

AND NAME .......................................................... 229

IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER

MALFUNCTIONS ............................................ 230

6. RADIO OPERATION (INTERNET

RADIO BROADCAST) ..................... 232

LISTENING TO INTERNET RADIO............. 232

7. DVD PLAYER OPERATION.............. 233

INSERTING A DISC............................................. 233

EJECTING A DISC ............................................... 233

PLAYING A DISC................................................. 233

PLAYING AN AUDIO DISC ........................... 234

PLAYING AN MP3/WMA DISC................. 236

OPERATING A DVD DISC ............................. 240

PLAYING A DVD DISC....................................... 241

DVD OPTIONS....................................................... 243

IF THE PLAYER MALFUNCTIONS .............. 251

DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO

DISC INFORMATION..................................... 252

8. USB MEMORY OPERATION........... 254

CONNECTING A USB MEMORY............. 254

PLAYING A USB MEMORY.......................... 255

9. iPod OPERATION.................................. 260

CONNECTING iPod .......................................... 260

PLAYING iPod.......................................................... 261

10. Bluetooth® AUDIO

OPERATION......................................... 264

CONNECTING A Bluetooth®

AUDIO PLAYER ................................................ 268

PLAYING Bluetooth® AUDIO....................... 269

11. AUDIO/VIDEO REMOTE

CONTROLS (STEERING

SWITCHES)............................................ 275

12. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

OPERATING HINTS .......................... 277

RADIO RECEPTION............................................ 277

iPod................................................................................ 278

USB MEMORY........................................................ 279

CARING FOR YOUR DVD

PLAYER AND DISC.......................................... 279

MP3/WMA FILES ................................................... 281

CD-R AND CD-RW DISCS............................. 283

TERMS......................................................................... 284

1. AUDIO SETTINGS................................. 288

HD Radio™ SYSTEM SETTINGS................... 288

iPod SETTINGS....................................................... 289

2SETUP

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

208

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

1. QUICK REFERENCE

Operations such as selecting a preset station and adjusting the sound balance are car-

ried out on the screen.

Using the instrument panel

Press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” button to display the audio/video screen.

Using the Remote Touch

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Radio” or “Media” to

display the audio/video screen.

If a Mark Levinson brand audio system is installed, the “Mark Levinson” logo is shown

on the panel.

209

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

No. Name Function Page

Function menu tab Select the desired radio or media mode screen

tab. 211

Function menu

display screen

Select to control the selected radio or media

mode. 211

“” button Press to mute/unmute or pause/resume the cur-

rent operation. —

“TUNE·SCROLL”

knob

Turn to step up and step down the station band,

change to the next or previous satellite radio

channel, or skip to the next or previous track,

DVD chapter, etc.

217, 227,

234, 236,

241, 255,

261, 269

“PRST·TRACK”

button

Press the “” or “” button to preset up or down

for a station or channel, or to change a desired

track, file or chapter.

Press and hold the “” or “” button to seek up or

down for a station or channel, or to fast forward-

ing/rewinding for a track, file or chapter.

218, 228,

234, 236,

241, 255,

261, 269

Disc slot Insert discs into the slot. 233

“RADIO” button Press to display the radio control screen. 211

“MEDIA” button Press to display the media control screen. 211

“PWR·VOL” knob Press to turn the audio/video system on and off,

and turn to adjust the volume. 211

“” button Press to eject a disc. 233

210

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

2. SOME BASICS

This section describes some of the basic

features of the audio/video system.

Some information may not pertain to

your system.

Your audio/video system works when

the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POW-

ER”> switch is turned to ACCESSORY

or IGNITION ON <ON> mode.

CAUTION

●For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada:

Part 15 of the FCC Rules

FCC WARNING: Changes or

modifications not expressly approved by

the party responsible for compliance

could void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment.

●Laser products

• USE OF CONTROL OR

ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE

OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN

THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY

RESULT IN HAZARDOUS

RADIATION EXPOSURE.

• THE USE OF OPTICAL

INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS

PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE

HAZARD.

NOTICE

●To prevent the 12-volt battery from being

discharged, do not leave the audio/video

system on longer than necessary when

the engine is not running <the hybrid sys-

tem is not operating>.

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

Press this switch to operate the voice

command system.

-For the operation of the voice command

system and its list of commands, see

pages 308 and 317.

AUDIO SPLIT SCREEN

DISPLAY

The audio split screen can be displayed

while the map screen is displayed. For

details, see page 46.

211

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

“RADIO”, “MEDIA” button: Press to dis-

play screen buttons for the audio/video sys-

tem.

“PWR·VOL” knob: Press to turn the audio/

video system on and off. Turn this knob to

adjust the volume. The system turns on in

the last mode used.

Using the instrument panel

1Each time the “RADIO” or “MEDIA”

button is pressed, the audio control

mode changes.

“RADIO” button: To display the “A M ” ,

“FM”, “SAT” and “Apps” tabs on the screen.

(Radio mode)

“MEDIA” button: To display the “DISC”,

“BT Audio”, “A U X ” , “USB” and “iPod” tabs

on the screen. (Media mode)

Using the Remote Touch

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON

AND OFF

-A function that enables automatic return

to the previous screen from the audio/

video screen can be selected. See page

51 for details.

SWITCHING BETWEEN

FUNCTIONS

212

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

2Select “Radio” or “Media”.

3Select the desired tab.

1Press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA”

button. (Using the instrument panel)

Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch and select “Radio” or

“Media”. (Using the Remote Touch)

2Select .

3Select the “DSP” tab to display this

screen.

4Select the desired items to be set.

5Select “OK”.

-Up to 4 tabs can be displayed on the

screen. Select or , located either

side of the screen tabs, to display tabs

from the previous or next page.

-The desired audio mode can be found by

selecting or and then selecting

that audio mode tab.

INFORMATION

●If a disc is not inserted, the DVD player

cannot be turned on.

●The DVD player can be turned off by

ejecting a disc.

●When radio or media mode is selected,

the respective screen buttons are dis-

played on the screen.

●Dimmed screen buttons cannot be oper-

ated.

DSP CONTROL

213

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

1Select “Automatic Sound Levelizer”.

2Select “On” or “Off”.

1Select “Surround”.

2Select “On” or “Off”.

1Select the “Sound” tab to display this

screen.

AUTOMATIC SOUND

LEVELIZER (ASL)

The system adjusts to the optimum vol-

ume and tone quality according to vehi-

cle speed to compensate for increased

vehicle noise.

SURROUND FUNCTION

This function can create a feeling of

presence.

TONE AND BALANCE

TONE

How good an audio program sounds is

largely determined by the mix of the tre-

ble, mid and bass levels. In fact, different

kinds of music and vocal programs usu-

ally sound better with different mixes of

treble, mid and bass.

BALANCE

A good balance of the left and right ste-

reo channels and of the front and rear

sound levels is also important.

Keep in mind that when listening to a ste-

reo recording or broadcast, changing

the right/left balance will increase the

volume of 1 group of sounds while de-

creasing the volume of another.

214

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

2Select the desired screen button.

3Select “OK”.

1Press the “MEDIA” button. (Using the

instrument panel)

Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch and select “Media”.

(Using the Remote Touch)

2Select the “DISC” tab.

3Select “Options”.

4Select “Wide”.

Screen button Function

“Treble”

“+” or “-”

Select to adjust high-

pitched tones.

“Mid”

“+” or “-”

Select to adjust mid-

pitched tones.

“Bass”

“+” or “-”

Select to adjust low-

pitched tones.

“Front” or “Rear”

Select to adjust the

sound balance between

the front and rear

speakers.

“L” or “R”

Select to adjust the

sound balance between

the left and right speak-

ers.

INFORMATION

●The tone of each mode (such as AM, FM

and DVD player) can be adjusted.

SELECTING SCREEN SIZE

Before selecting screen size, it is neces-

sary to insert a DVD disc and select

DISC mode.

215

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

5Select the desired screen button.

-When is selected, the previous

screen is displayed.

6Select “Save”.

1When inserting a disc, gently insert the

disc with the label facing up.

No. Function

Select to display a 3 : 4 screen, with

either side in black.

Select to widen the 3 : 4 screen hori-

zontally to fill the screen.

Select to widen the 3 : 4 screen verti-

cally and horizontally, by the same ra-

tio, to fill the screen.

DVD PLAYER

NOTICE

●Never try to disassemble or oil any part of

the DVD player. Do not insert anything

other than a disc into the slot.

INFORMATION

●The player is intended for use with 4.7 in.

(12 cm) discs only.

216

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

1Press the “MEDIA” button to display the

media control screen and select the

“A U X ” tab or press the “MEDIA” button

repeatedly to change to AUX mode.

-For the Remote Touch operation method,

see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNC-

TIONS” on page 211. 1Press the “MEDIA” button to display the

media control screen and select the

“USB” or “iPod” tab or press the “ME-

DIA” button repeatedly to change to

USB memory/iPod mode.

-For the Remote Touch operation method,

see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNC-

TIONS” on page 211.

AUX PORT

The sound of portable audio players

connected to the AUX port can be en-

joyed. For details, refer to “Owner’s

Manual”.

CAUTION

●Do not connect portable audio device or

operate the controls.

NOTICE

●Depending on the size and shape of the

portable audio device that is connected

to the system, the armrest may not close

fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the

armrest as this may damage the portable

audio device or the terminal, etc.

●Do not leave portable audio device in the

vehicle. The temperature inside the vehi-

cle may become high, resulting in dam-

age to the player.

●Do not push down on or apply unneces-

sary pressure to the portable audio

device while it is connected as this may

damage the portable audio device or its

terminal.

●Do not insert foreign objects into the port

as this may damage the portable audio

device or its terminal.

INFORMATION

●When the portable audio player is not

connected to the AUX port, the tab will

be dimmed.

USB PORT

A USB memory/iPod can be connected

to the USB port. For details, see “CON-

NECTING A USB MEMORY” on page

254 and “CONNECTING iPod” on

page 260.

INFORMATION

●When a USB memory/iPod is not con-

nected with the USB port, the tab will be

dimmed.

217

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

3. RADIO OPERATION

1Press the “RADIO” button.

2Select the “A M ” , “FM”, “SAT” or “Apps”

tab or press the “RADIO” button re-

peatedly to select the desired tab.

-For the Remote Touch operation method,

see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNC-

TIONS” on page 211.

1Turn the knob clockwise to step up the

station band or counterclockwise to

step down.

LISTENING TO THE RADIO

SELECTING A RADIO

STATION

STEP UP AND DOWN THE

STATION BAND

INFORMATION

●The radio automatically changes to ste-

reo reception when a stereo broadcast is

received.

218

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

1Tune in the desired station.

2Select one of the left side screen buttons

(1-6) and hold it until a beep is heard.

This sets the frequency to the screen

button. The station’s frequency will be

displayed in the screen button.

-To change the preset station to a different

one, follow the same procedure.

Preset tuning: Select one of the mix preset

channels on the left side of the screen or

press the “” or “” button of

“PRST·TRACK” to select the desired sta-

tion. The screen button is highlighted and

the station frequency appears on the

screen.

Seek tuning: Press and hold the “” or “”

button of “PRST·TRACK”. The radio will

begin seeking up or down for a station of the

nearest frequency and will stop when a sta-

tion is found. Each time the button is

pressed, the stations will be searched auto-

matically one after another.

To scan all the frequencies: Select

“SCAN”. “SCAN” will appear on the

screen. The radio will find the next station

and stay there for 10 seconds if “A l l ” or “HD

Only” is selected, or 5 seconds if “Analog”

is selected, and then scan again. To stay

tuned to a station and stop the scanning, se-

lect “SCAN” again. (To set HD Radio™

system, see page 288.)

PRESETTING A STATION

Radio mode has a mix preset function,

which can store up to 36 stations (6 sta-

tions per page x 6 pages) from any of the

AM, FM or SAT bands.

SELECTING A STATION

Tune in the desired station using one of

the following methods.

219

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

1Select “Options”.

2Select “TYPE ” or “TYPE” to move

forward and backward through the pro-

gram list.

-Once a program type has been set, “TYPE

SEEK” will appear on the screen.

-The program list is in the following order:

• Classical

•Country

• EasyLis (Easy Listening)

• Inform (Information)

•Jazz

•News

• Oldies

•Other

•Pop Music

• Religion

•Rock

•R&B (Rhythm and Blues)

•Sports

•Talk

• Traffic (Not available when “HD Radio

Settings” are set to analog.)

• Alert (Emergency Alert)

3Select “TYPE SEEK” and the system

will start to seek for stations in the rele-

vant program type.

RADIO BROADCAST DATA

SYSTEM

This audio system is equipped with Ra-

dio Broadcast Data Systems (RBDS).

RBDS mode allows text messages to be

received from radio stations that utilize

RBDS transmitters.

When RBDS is on, the radio can

— only select stations of a particular pro-

gram type,

— display messages from radio stations,

— search for a stronger signal station.

RBDS features are available only when

listening to an FM station that broad-

casts RBDS information and the “FM in-

fo” indicator is on.

SELECTING A DESIRED TYPE

INFORMATION

●If no relevant program can be found, “no

type” will appear on the screen.

220

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

“Traffic”: Select to seek a traffic program

station. “TRAF SEEK” will appear on the

screen.

TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT

A station that regularly broadcasts traf-

fic information is automatically located.

INFORMATION

●If no traffic program station is found, “No

Traffic” will appear on the screen.

●If a traffic program station is found, the

name of the traffic program station will be

displayed for a while.

221

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

4. HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY INFORMATION

1Press the “RADIO” button.

2Select the “A M ” or “FM” tab or press

the “RADIO” button repeatedly to se-

lect the desired tab.

-For the Remote Touch operation method,

see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNC-

TIONS” on page 211.

-As a user works through the analog radio

stations, (where applicable) the radio

receiver will automatically tune from an

analog signal to a digital signal within 10

seconds.

-An orange “HD)” logo indicator will be dis-

played on the screen when in digital. The

“HD)” logo will first appear in a gray color

indicating the station is indeed (an analog

and) a digital station. Once the digital sig-

nal is acquired, the logo will change to a

bright orange color.

-The song title, artist name and music genre

will appear on the screen when available by

the radio station.

3This screen will be displayed if “Op-

tions” is selected.

-When “Text” is selected, information such

as the artist name, song title, album title and

music genre of the track being listened to

are displayed on the text screen. To display

messages from the station, select “Addi-

tional Information”.

-When “TYPE ” or “TYPE” is selected,

a program type will be searched. Once a

program type has been set, “TYPE SEEK”

will appear on the screen. (See “SELECT-

ING A DESIRED TYPE” on page 219.)

HD Radio™ Technology is the digital

evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your

radio product has a special receiver

which allows it to receive digital broad-

casts (where available) in addition to the

analog broadcasts it already receives.

Digital broadcasts have better sound

quality than analog broadcasts as digital

broadcasts provide free, crystal clear

audio with no static or distortion. For

more information, and a guide to avail-

able radio stations and programming,

refer to www.hdradio.com.

USING HD Radio™

TECHNOLOGY

222

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

1Select “Multicast”.

-Each time “Multicast” is selected, the sup-

plemental program changes.

-If “Multicast” is selected when tuned to the

last of the supplemental programs, the main

program will be returned to.

1Select “Tag” to bookmark the music in-

formation.

2Grip the knob to release the lock, and

lift the armrest to open.

3Open the cover and connect iPod using

an iPod cable.

AVAILABLE HD Radio™

TECHNOLOGY

MULTICAST

On the FM radio frequency most digital

stations have “multiple” or supplemental

programs on one FM station.

TAG

223

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

-Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not

turned on.

-Once an iPod is connected, the music tag

moves from the radio into the iPod.

-When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the

“tagged” information of the songs which

were tagged while listening to the radio can

be viewed. Then a user may decide to pur-

chase the song or CD/Album which had

been listened to on their radio.

4Close the console box.

INFORMATION

●If tagging the music information fails,

“Saving the HD Radio tag failed.” will be

displayed on the screen. If this occurs, tag

the information again.

●HD Radio™ stations can be preset.

224

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Experience Cause Action

Mismatch of time align-

ment- a user may hear a

short period of program-

ming replayed or an echo,

stutter or skip.

The radio stations analog

and digital volume is not

properly aligned or the sta-

tion is in ballgame mode.

None, radio broadcast issue. A

user can contact the radio station.

Sound fades, blending in

and out.

Radio is shifting between

analog and digital audio.

Reception issue, may clear-up as

the vehicle continues to be driven.

Selecting “A n a l o g ” can force radio

in an analog audio.

Audio mute condition

when an HD2/HD3 multi-

cast channel had been play-

ing.

The radio does not have ac-

cess to digital signals at the

moment.

This is normal behavior, wait until

the digital signal returns. If out of

the coverage area, seek a new sta-

tion.

Audio mute delay when se-

lecting an HD2/HD3 mul-

ticast channel preset.

The digital multicast con-

tent is not available until HD

Radio™ broadcast can be

decoded and make the au-

dio available. This takes up

to 7 seconds.

This is normal behavior, wait for the

audio to become available.

Text information does not

match the present song au-

dio.

Data service issue by the

radio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified.

Complete the form;

www.ibiquity.com/automotive/

report_radio_station_experiences.

No text information shown

for the present selected fre-

quency.

Data service issue by the

radio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified.

Complete the form;

www.ibiquity.com/automotive/

report_radio_station_experiences.

225

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital

Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and

“Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

226

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

5. RADIO OPERATION (XM Satellite Radio BROADCAST)

HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN

XM Satellite Radio

To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in

the vehicle, a subscription to the XM

Satellite Radio service is necessary.

An XM Satellite Radio is a tuner de-

signed exclusively to receive broadcasts

provided under a separate subscription.

Availability is limited to the 48 contigu-

ous U.S. states and some Canadian

provinces.

HOW TO SUBSCRIBE

It is necessary to enter into a separate

service agreement with XM Satellite

Radio in order to receive satellite broad-

cast programming in the vehicle. Addi-

tional activation and service

subscription fees apply that are not in-

cluded in the purchase price of the vehi-

cle and digital satellite tuner.

-For complete information on subscrip-

tion rates and terms, or to subscribe to

XM Satellite Radio:

U.S.A.

Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call

1-866-635-2349.

Canada

Refer to www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677.

INFORMATION

●XM Satellite Radio is solely responsible

for the quality, availability and content of

the satellite radio services provided,

which are subject to the terms and condi-

tions of the XM Satellite Radio customer

service agreement.

●Customers should have their radio ID

ready; the radio ID can be found by tun-

ing to “CH 000” on the radio. For details,

see “DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID”

below.

●All fees and programming are the

responsibility of XM Satellite Radio and

are subject to change.

227

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

-If “CH 000” is selected using the

“TUNE·SCROLL” knob, the ID code,

which is 8 alphanumeric characters, will be

displayed. If another channel is selected,

the ID code will no longer be displayed.

The channel (000) alternates between dis-

playing the radio ID and the specific radio

code.

1Press the “RADIO” button.

2Select the “SAT” tab or press the “RA-

DIO” button repeatedly until the “SAT”

tab is selected.

-For the Remote Touch operation method,

see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNC-

TIONS” on page 211.

3Turn the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob to se-

lect the next or previous channel.

-Turning the knob quickly allows rapid

scrolling through the channel list.

SATELLITE TUNER

TECHNOLOGY NOTICE

Lexus’s satellite radio tuners are award-

ed Type Approval Certificates from XM

Satellite Radio Inc. as proof of compati-

bility with the services offered by XM

Satellite Radio.

DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID

Each XM tuner is identified with a

unique radio ID. The radio ID is required

when activating an XM service or when

reporting a problem.

LISTENING TO SATELLITE

RADIO

228

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

1Select either “TYPE ” or “ TYPE” to

go to the next or previous category.

1Tune in the desired channel.

2Select one of the left side screen buttons

(1-6) and hold it until a beep is heard.

This sets the frequency to the screen

button. The channel number will be dis-

played in the screen button.

-To change the preset channel to a different

one, follow the same procedure.

Preset tuning: Select the channel selector

screen button (1-6) or press the “” or “”

button of “PRST·TRACK” to listen to the

desired channel. The selected screen but-

ton (1-6) is highlighted and its related infor-

mation appears on the right side of the

screen.

To select a channel within the current cate-

gory: Press and hold the “” or “” button

of “PRST·TRACK”. The radio will change

up or down to a channel within the current

channel category.

To scan the currently selected channel cat-

egory: Select “SCAN”. “SCAN” appears

on the screen. The radio will find the next

channel in the same channel category, stay

there for a few seconds, and then scan

again. To select a channel, select “SCAN”

again.

CHANNEL CATEGORY

PRESETTING A CHANNEL

SELECTING A CHANNEL

Tune in the desired channel using one of

the following methods.

229

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

1Select “Text” to display the artist name

and song title currently being listening

to.

DISPLAYING THE TITLE AND

NAME

INFORMATION

●Up to 64 alphanumeric characters can

be displayed. (Some information will not

be fully displayed.)

230

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER MALFUNCTIONS

When problems occur with the XM tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Refer-

ring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested corrective action.

Message Explanation

Ck Antenna

The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antenna

cable is attached securely.

A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna ca-

ble. See a Lexus certified dealer for assistance.

Ch Unauth

You have not subscribed to XM Satellite Radio. The radio is being

updated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM Satellite Radio

for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can

choose “CH 000” and all free-to-air channels.

The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about

2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH

001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. To

listen to the premium channel, contact XM Satellite Radio.

No Signal The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your ve-

hicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.

Loading The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit

has received the information.

Ch Off Air The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Se-

lect another channel.

----- There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with

the channel at that time. No action is required.

Ch Unavail

The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 sec-

onds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH 001”. If it

does not change automatically, select another channel.

INFORMATION

●Contact the XM Listener Care Center at 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-438-9677

(Canada).

231

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

NOTICE

●This equipment has been tested and

found to comply with the limits for a class

B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. These limits are designed to

provide reasonable protection against

harmful interference in a residential

installation. This equipment generates,

uses and can radiate radio frequency

energy and, if not installed and used in

accordance with the instructions, may

cause harmful interference to radio com-

munications. However, there is no guar-

antee that interference will not occur in a

particular installation.

●If this equipment does cause harmful

interference to radio or television recep-

tion, which can be determined by turning

the equipment off and on, the user is

encouraged to try to correct the interfer-

ence by one or more of the following

measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving

antenna.

• Increase the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet

on a circuit different from that to which

the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced

radio/TV technician for help.

●Information to user

• Alternation or modifications carried

out without appropriate authorization

may invalidate the user’s right to oper-

ate the equipment.

INFORMATION

●This XM tuner supports “Audio Services”

(Music and Talk) of only XM Satellite

Radio and “Text Information*” linked to

the respective “Audio Services”.

*: Text Information includes, Station

Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title and

Category Name.

232

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

6. RADIO OPERATION (INTERNET RADIO BROADCAST)

1Press the “RADIO” button.

2Select the “Apps” tab or press the “RA-

DIO” button repeatedly until the “Apps”

tab is selected.

-For the Remote Touch operation method,

see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNC-

TIONS” on page 211.

-If a compatible phone is already registered,

it will be connected automatically.

-If a compatible phone has not been regis-

tered or the Bluetooth® connection cannot

be completed correctly, select “Connect”

to register and/or connect your phone.

(See page 194.)

-When connection is complete, the applica-

tion screen can be displayed.

3Select “View Application Screen”.

-The internet radio application screen is dis-

played.

-Perform operations according to the dis-

played application screen.

-By pressing the “RADIO” button, the

“Audio” screen can be returned to.

*: For details, refer to http://

www.lexus.com/enform/ or call 1-800-

255-3987.

LISTENING TO INTERNET

RADIO

One of Apps’s features is the ability to

listen to internet radio. In order to use

this service, an Apps compatible phone

and the navigation system needs to be

set. For details, refer to the “APPS” sec-

tion. (See page 356.)

INFORMATION

●Other applications can be activated

while listening to internet radio.

●An iPhone cannot be connected via

Bluetooth® and USB connection at the

same time. However, it is possible to

recharge an iPhone while using Apps by

connecting via USB. The system uses the

connection method that was used last.

Therefore, if connected via USB after

Bluetooth® connection, it is necessary to

reconnect the iPhone via Bluetooth®.

●Services requiring a separate contract

can also be used.*

●Some parts of “Apps” can be adjusted

using the switches on the steering wheel.

●If internet radio has never been listened

to by activating “Apps” from the “Informa-

tion” screen, the “Apps” tab will be

dimmed.

233

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

7. DVD PLAYER OPERATION

1Insert a disc into the disc slot.

-After insertion, the disc is automatically

loaded.

1Press the “” button and remove the

disc.

1Press the “MEDIA” button if a disc has

already been loaded in the disc slot.

For safety reasons, the DVD video discs

can only be viewed when the following

conditions are met:

(a) The vehicle is completely stopped.

(b) The “START STOP ENGINE”

<“POWER”> switch is in

ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON

<ON> mode.

While driving in DVD video mode, only

the DVD’s audio can be heard.

INSERTING A DISC

EJECTING A DISC

INFORMATION

●If a disc is inserted with the label facing

down, it cannot be played.

PLAYING A DISC

234

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

2Select the “DISC” tab or press the

“MEDIA” button repeatedly until the

“DISC” tab is selected.

-For the Remote Touch operation method,

see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNC-

TIONS” on page 211.

1Select the “DISC” tab.

-When CD-TEXT information exists, the

name and artist of the CD currently being

listened to will be displayed.

: Select to pause the track.

: Select to resume playing the track.

■ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN

, : Select to skip to the next or previous

track.

“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “” or

“” button of “PRST·TRACK” repeatedly

until the desired track number appears on

the screen. The player will start playing the

selected track from the beginning.

“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob

clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to

the desired track.

PLAYING AN AUDIO DISC

SELECTING A DESIRED

TRACK

235

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

■ON THE TRACK LIST SCREEN

1Select the track name screen button to

display the CD’s track list.

2Select the desired track number. The

player will start playing the selected

track from the beginning.

, : Select to move the list up or down by

5 track groups. If either of these screen but-

tons is selected when the top/bottom page

of the list is displayed, the last/first page is

displayed.

“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “” or

“” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scroll

through the track list one by one.

“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob

clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly

scroll up or down the track list.

, : If appears to the right of an item

name, the complete name is too long for the

screen. Select to scroll to the end of the

name. Select to move to the beginning of

the name.

■FAST FORWARDING OR RE-

WINDING

1Press and hold the “” or “” button of

“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or re-

wind the disc.

-When the button is released, the player

resumes playing from that position.

■REPEATING A TRACK

1Select “RPT” while the track is playing.

-“RPT” appears on the screen. When the

track is finished, the player will automati-

cally play it again. To cancel this function,

select “RPT” again.

REPEATING

The track currently being listened to can

be repeated.

236

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

■PLAYING THE TRACKS ON THE

DISC IN RANDOM ORDER

1Select “RAND” while the disc is playing.

-Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the

system selects a track randomly from the

disc currently being listened to. To cancel

this function, select “RAND” again.

1Select the “DISC” tab.

-The file name, folder name and artist name

currently being listened to and the disc icon

are displayed on the screen.

: Select to pause the file.

: Select to resume playing the file.

■ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN

, : Select to skip to the next or previous

folder.

RANDOM ORDER

Tracks or albums can be automatically

and randomly selected.

INFORMATION

●If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of

the disc and track will be displayed. Up to

32 characters can be displayed.

PLAYING AN MP3/WMA DISC

SELECTING A DESIRED

FOLDER

237

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

■ON THE FOLDER LIST SCREEN

1Select the folder name screen button to

display the following folder list screen.

2Select the desired folder number to dis-

play the folder’s file list. From the file list,

select the desired file number.

, : Select to move the list up or down by

5 folder groups. If either of these screen

buttons is selected when the top/bottom

page of the list is displayed, the last/first

page is displayed.

“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob

clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly

scroll up or down the folder list.

, : If appears to the right of an item

name, the complete name is too long for the

screen. Select to scroll to the end of the

name. Select to move to the beginning of

the name.

■FAST FORWARDING OR RE-

WINDING

1Press and hold the “” or “” button of

“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or re-

wind the file.

-When the button is released, the player

resumes playing from that position.

■ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN

, : Select to skip to the next or previous

file.

“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “” or

“” button of “PRST·TRACK” repeatedly

until the desired file number appears on the

screen. The player will start playing the se-

lected file from the beginning.

“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob

clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to

the desired file.

SELECTING A DESIRED FILE

238

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

■ON THE FILE LIST SCREEN

1Select the file name screen button to

display the following file list screen.

2Select the desired file number. The play-

er will start playing the selected file from

the beginning.

, : Select to move the list up or down by

5 file groups. If either of these screen but-

tons is selected when the top/bottom page

of the list is displayed, the last/first page is

displayed.

“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “” or

“” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scroll

through the file list one by one.

“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob

clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly

scroll up or down the file list.

, : If appears to the right of an item

name, the complete name is too long for the

screen. Select to scroll to the end of the

name. Select to move to the beginning of

the name.

■FAST FORWARDING OR RE-

WINDING

1Press and hold the “” or “” button of

“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or re-

wind the file.

-When the button is released, the player

resumes playing from that position.

■REPEATING A FILE

1Select “RPT” while the file is playing.

REPEATING

The file or folder currently being listened

to can be repeated.

239

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

-Each time “RPT” is selected, the mode

changes as follows:

When “RAND” is off

• File Repeat Folder Repeat Off

When “RAND” is on

• File RepeatOff

-“RPT” appears on the screen. When the file

is finished, the player will automatically play

it again. To cancel this function, select

“RPT” repeatedly until the repeat mode

turns off.

■REPEATING A FOLDER

1Select “RPT” repeatedly until

“FLD.RPT” appears on the screen.

-When the folder is finished, the player will

automatically go back to the beginning of

the folder and play it again. To cancel this

function, select “RPT” again.

■PLAYING FILES FROM ONE

FOLDER IN RANDOM ORDER

1Select “RAND” while the disc is playing.

-Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode

changes as follows:

•Random (1 Folder Random)



Folder Random (1 Disc Random) Off

-Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the

system selects a file randomly from the

folder currently being listened to. To cancel

this function, select “RAND” repeatedly

until the random mode turns off.

■PLAYING THE FILES IN ALL THE

FOLDERS ON THE DISC IN RAN-

DOM ORDER

1Select “RAND” repeatedly until

“FLD.RAND” appears on the screen.

-Once “FLD.RAND” appears on the screen,

the system selects a file randomly from all

of the existing folders. To cancel this func-

tion, select “RAND” again.

RANDOM ORDER

Files or folders can be automatically and

randomly selected.

INFORMATION

●When a file is skipped or the system is

inoperative, select “RAND” to reset.

240

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

OPERATING A DVD DISC

The playback condition of some DVD

discs may be determined by the DVD

software producer. This DVD player

plays a disc as the software producer in-

tended. As such some functions may not

work properly. Be sure to read the in-

struction manual that comes with the in-

dividual DVD disc. For detailed

information about DVD video discs, see

“DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO

DISC INFORMATION” on page 252.

PRECAUTIONS ON DVD

VIDEO DISC

When recording with a DVD video, au-

dio tracks may not record in some cases

while the menu is displayed. As audio

will not play in this case, verify that the

video tracks are playing and then acti-

vate playback.

When playback of a disc is completed:

If an audio CD or MP3/WMA disc is

playing, the first track or file starts.

If a DVD video is playing, playback will

stop or the menu screen will be dis-

played.

The title/chapter number and playback

time display may not appear while play-

ing back certain DVD video discs.

CAUTION

●Conversational speech on some DVDs is

recorded at a low volume to emphasize

the impact of sound effects. If you adjust

the volume assuming that the conversa-

tions represent the maximum volume

level that the DVD will play, you may be

startled by louder sound effects or when

you change to a different audio source.

The louder sounds may have a significant

impact on the human body or pose a driv-

ing hazard. Keep this in mind when you

adjust the volume.

241

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

1Press the “MEDIA” button if a disc has

already been loaded in the disc slot.

2Select the “DISC” tab or press the “ME-

DIA” button repeatedly until the “DISC”

tab is selected.

-For the Remote Touch operation method,

see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNC-

TIONS” on page 211.

-Select “Options” on the “DVD” screen,

then select “Wide” on the “DVD Options”

screen. The screen mode can be changed.

-If “Full Screen” is selected when the vehicle

is completely stopped and the parking

brake is applied, the video screen returns.

-If is selected, while watching a DVD, the

DVD controls will appear.

PLAYING A DVD DISC DISPLAYING DVD

CONTROLS

INFORMATION

●If appears on the screen when a con-

trol is selected, the operation relevant to

the control is not permitted.

242

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

■CHANGING A CHAPTER

1Press the “” or “” button of

“PRST·TRACK” or turn the

“TUNE·SCROLL” knob to change the

chapter.

1Select the menu item using , ,

or and select “Enter”. The

player starts playing the disc from the

start of the selected item.

-When is selected, the previous

screen is displayed.

DESCRIPTION OF DVD VIDEO

CONTROLS

Screen button Function

“Top Menu”,

“Menu”

Select to display the menu

screen for DVD video.

The menu control key ap-

pears on the screen. (See

page 242.)

Select to pause the video

screen.

Select to rewind during

playback.

Select to stop the video

screen.

Select to resume normal

play during pause.

Select to fast forward dur-

ing playback and forward

frame by frame during

pause.

SELECTING A MENU ITEM

INFORMATION

●According to the DVD disc, some menu

items can be selected directly. (For

details, see the manual that comes with

the DVD disc provided separately.)

243

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

1Select the “DISC” tab.

2Select “Options”.

3This screen is displayed.

1Select “Search” on the “DVD Options”

screen.

2Enter the title number and select “OK”.

-The player starts playing video for that title

number.

-If the wrong numbers are entered, select

to delete the numbers.

-When is selected, the previous

screen is displayed.

DVD OPTIONS

No. Function

Select to display the title search

screen. (See page 243.)

Select to display the predetermined

scene on the screen and start playing.

Select to display the audio selection

screen. (See page 244.)

Select to display the subtitle selection

screen. (See page 244.)

Select to display the angle selection

screen. (See page 244.)

Select to display the screen mode

screen. (See page 214.)

Select to display the image quality ad-

justment screen. (See page 244.)

Select to display the initial setup

screen. (See page 245.)

SEARCHING BY TITLE

No. Function

244

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

1Select “Au d i o ” on the “DVD Options”

screen.

2Each time “Change” is selected, the au-

dio language is changed.

-The languages available are restricted to

those available on the DVD disc.

-When is selected, the previous

screen is displayed.

1Select “Subtitle” on the “DVD Options”

screen.

2Each time “Change” is selected, the lan-

guage the subtitles are displayed in is

changed.

-The languages available are restricted to

those available on the DVD disc.

-When “Hide” is selected, the subtitles can

be hidden.

-When is selected, the previous

screen is displayed.

1Select “Angle” on the “DVD Options”

screen.

2Each time “Change” is selected, the an-

gle is changed.

-The angles available are restricted to those

available on the DVD disc.

-When is selected, the previous

screen is displayed.

CHANGING THE AUDIO

LANGUAGE

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE

LANGUAGE

CHANGING THE ANGLE

The angle can be selected for discs that

are multi-angle compatible when the an-

gle mark appears on the screen.

AUDIO SCREEN

ADJUSTMENT

The brightness, contrast, color and tone

of the screen can be adjusted. In addi-

tion, the display can be turned off and

the screen can be changed to either day

or night mode.

245

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

■CONTRAST, BRIGHTNESS, COL-

OR AND TONE ADJUSTMENT

1Select “Display” on the “DVD Options”

screen.

2Select “” or “” to display the desired

item to be adjusted.

3After adjusting the screen, select “OK”.

-The screen goes off when “Screen Off” is

selected. To turn the screen back on, press

any button on the audio panel or on the

Remote Touch. The selected screen

appears.

1Select “DVD Settings” on the “DVD

Options” screen.

2Select the items to be set.

3After the initial setting has been

changed, select “Save”.

-This screen will close, and the system will

return to the previous screen.

-When “Default” is selected, all menus are

initialized.

Screen button Function

“Contrast” “+” Select to strengthen the

contrast of the screen.

“Contrast” “-” Select to weaken the

contrast of the screen.

“Brightness” “+” Select to brighten the

screen.

“Brightness” “-” Select to darken the

screen.

“Color” “R” Select to strengthen the

red color of the screen.

“Color” “G”

Select to strengthen the

green color of the

screen.

“Tone” “+” Select to strengthen the

tone of the screen.

“Tone” “-” Select to weaken the

tone of the screen.

DVD SETTINGS

246

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

■AUDIO LANGUAGE

1Select “Audio Language” on the “DVD

Settings” screen.

2Select the desired language to be heard

on the “Audio Language” screen.

-If the desired language to be heard cannot

be found on this screen, select “Other” and

enter a language code. For entry of a lan-

guage code, see “ENTER AUDIO/SUBTI-

TLE/MENU LANGUAGE CODE” on

page 248.

-To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,

select .

3Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings”

screen.

■SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

1Select “Subtitle Language” on the

“DVD Settings” screen.

2Select the desired language to be read

on the “Subtitle Language” screen.

-If the desired language to be read cannot

be found on this screen, select “Other” and

enter a language code. For entry of a lan-

guage code, see “ENTER AUDIO/SUBTI-

TLE/MENU LANGUAGE CODE” on

page 248.

-To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,

select .

3Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings”

screen.

■MENU LANGUAGE

1Select “Menu Language” on the “DVD

Settings” screen.

2Select the desired language to be read

on the “Menu Language” screen.

-If the desired language to be read cannot

be found on this screen, select “Other” and

enter a language code. For entry of a lan-

guage code, see “ENTER AUDIO/SUBTI-

TLE/MENU LANGUAGE CODE” on

page 248.

-To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,

select .

3Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings”

screen.

■ANGLE MARK

1Select “Angle Mark” on the “DVD Set-

tings” screen.

2Select “On” or “Off”.

3Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings”

screen.

The audio language can be changed.

The subtitle language can be changed.

The language on the DVD video menu

can be changed.

The multi-angle mark can be turned on

or off on the screen while discs that are

multi-angle compatible are being

played.

247

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

■PARENTAL LOCK

1Select “Parental Lock” on the “DVD

Settings” screen.

2Enter the 4-digit personal code on the

“Key Code” screen.

-If the wrong numbers are entered, select

to delete the numbers.

-To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,

select .

3Select a parental level (1-8) on the “Se-

lect Restriction Level” screen.

-To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,

select .

4Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings”

screen.

■AUTO START PLAYBACK

1Select “Auto Start Playback” on the

“DVD Settings” screen.

2Select “On” or “Off”.

3Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings”

screen.

■SOUND DYNAMIC RANGE

1Select “Sound Dynamic Range” on the

“DVD Settings” screen.

2Select “MAX”, “STD” or “MIN”.

3Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings”

screen.

The level of viewer restrictions can be

changed.

Discs that are inserted while the vehicle

is in motion will automatically start play-

ing. Certain discs may not play.

The difference between the lowest vol-

ume and the highest volume can be ad-

justed.

248

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

1Enter the 4-digit language code.

-If the wrong numbers are entered, select

to delete the numbers.

-To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,

select .

2Select “OK”.

3Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings”

screen.

ENTER AUDIO/SUBTITLE/

MENU LANGUAGE CODE

If “Other” on the “Audio Language”

screen, “Subtitle Language” screen or

“Menu Language” screen is selected,

the desired language to be heard or

read can be selected by entering a lan-

guage code.

Code Language

0514 English

1001 Japanese

0618 French

0405 German

0920 Italian

0519 Spanish

2608 Chinese

1412 Dutch

1620 Portuguese

1922 Swedish

1821 Russian

1115 Korean

0512 Greek

0101 Afar

0102 Abkhazian

0106 Afrikaans

0113 Amharic

0118 Arabic

0119 Assamese

0125 Aymara

0126 Azerbaijani

0201 Bashkir

0205 Byelorussian

0207 Bulgarian

0208 Bihari

0209 Bislama

249

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

0214 Bengali, Bangla

0215 Tibetan

0218 Breton

0301 Catalan

0315 Corsican

0319 Czech

0325 Welsh

0401 Danish

0426 Bhutani

0515 Esperanto

0520 Estonian

0521 Basque

0601 Persian

0609 Finnish

0610 Fiji

0615 Faroese

0625 Frisian

0701 Irish

0704 Scottish-Gaelic

0712 Galician

0714 Guarani

0721 Gujarati

0801 Hausa

0809 Hindi

0818 Croatian

0821 Hungarian

Code Language

0825 Armenian

0901 Interlingua

0905 Interlingue

0911 Inupiak

0914 Indonesian

0919 Icelandic

0923 Hebrew

1009 Yiddish

1023 Javanese

1101 Georgian

1111 Kazakh

1112 Greenlandic

1113 Cambodian

1114 Kannada

1119 Kashmiri

1121 Kurdish

1125 Kirghiz

1201 Latin

1214 Lingala

1215 Laotian

1220 Lithuanian

1222 Latvian, Lettish

1307 Malagasy

1309 Maori

1311 Macedonian

1312 Malayalam

Code Language

250

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

1314 Mongolian

1315 Moldavian

1318 Marathi

1319 Malay

1320 Maltese

1325 Burmese

1401 Nauru

1405 Nepali

1415 Norwegian

1503 Occitan

1513 (Afan) Oromo

1518 Oriya

1601 Panjabi

1612 Polish

1619 Pashto, Pushto

1721 Quechua

1813 Rhaeto-Romance

1814 Kirundi

1815 Romanian

1823 Kinyarwanda

1901 Sanskrit

1904 Sindhi

1907 Sango

1908 Serbo-Croatian

1909 Sinhalese

1911 Slovak

Code Language

1912 Slovenian

1913 Samoan

1914 Shona

1915 Somali

1917 Albanian

1918 Serbian

1919 Siswati

1920 Sesotho

1921 Sundanese

1923 Swahili

2001 Tamil

2005 Telugu

2007 Tajik

2008 Thai

2009 Tigrinya

2011 Turkmen

2012 Tagalog

2014 Setswana

2015 Tongan

2018 Turkish

2019 Tsonga

2020 Tatar

2023 Twi

2111 Ukrainian

2118 Urdu

2126 Uzbek

Code Language

251

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

If “Check DISC” appears on the screen: It

indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged, or it

was inserted upside down. Clean the disc or

insert it correctly. If a disc which is not play-

able is inserted, “Check DISC” will also ap-

pear on the screen. For appropriate discs

for the player, see “AUDIO/VIDEO SYS-

TEM OPERATING HINTS” on page 277.

If “Region code error” appears on the

screen: It indicates that the DVD region

code is not set properly.

If the malfunction is not rectified: Take

your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.

2209 Vietnamese

2215 Volapük

2315 Wolof

2408 Xhosa

2515 Yoruba

2621 Zulu

Code Language IF THE PLAYER

MALFUNCTIONS

If the player or another unit equipped

with the player malfunctions, the audio/

video system will display a message.

These are described below.

INFORMATION

●If an MP3/WMA disc contains CD-DA

files only, the CD-DA files can be played.

If an MP3/WMA disc contains CD-DA

files and files other than CD-DA files,

only MP3/WMA files can be played.

252

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

Region codes: Some DVD video discs have

a region code indicating which countries

the DVD video disc can be played in on this

DVD player. If the DVD video disc is not la-

beled as “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it on

this DVD player. If you attempt to play an in-

appropriate DVD video disc on this player,

“Region code error” appears on the screen.

Even if the DVD video disc does not have a

region code, there are cases when it cannot

be used.

■MARKS SHOWN ON DVD VIDEO

DISCS

DVD PLAYER AND DVD

VIDEO DISC INFORMATION

DVD VIDEO DISCS

This DVD player conforms to NTSC/

PAL color TV formats. DVD video discs

conforming to another format such as

SECAM cannot be used.

NTSC/PAL Indicates NTSC/PAL

format of color TV.

Indicates the number

of audio tracks.

Indicates the number

of language subtitles.

Indicates the number

of angles.

Indicates the screen to

be selected.

Wide screen: 16:9

Standard: 4:3

Indicates a region

code by which this vid-

eo disc can be played.

ALL: in all countries

Number: region code

253

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc that

holds video. DVD video discs have adopted

“MPEG2”, one of the world standards of

digital compression technologies. The pic-

ture data is compressed by 1/40 on aver-

age and stored. Variable rate encoded

technology in which the volume of data as-

signed to the picture is changed depending

on the picture format has also been adopt-

ed. Audio data is stored using PCM and

Dolby Digital, which enables higher quality

of sound. Furthermore, multi-angle and

multi-language features will also help users

enjoy the more advanced technology of

DVD video.

Viewer restrictions: This feature limits what

can be viewed in conformity with a level of

restrictions of the country. The level of re-

strictions varies depending on the DVD vid-

eo disc. Some DVD video discs cannot be

played at all, or violent scenes are skipped

or replaced with other scenes.

• Level 1: DVD video discs for children can

be played.

• Level 2 - 7: DVD video discs for children

and G-rated movie can be played.

• Level 8: All types of the DVD video discs

can be played.

Multi-angle feature: The same scene can

be enjoyed from different angles.

Multi-language feature: The subtitle and

audio language can be selected.

Region codes: The region codes are pro-

vided on DVD players and DVD discs. If the

DVD video disc does not have the same re-

gion code as the DVD player, you cannot

play the disc on the DVD player. For region

codes, see page 252.

Audio: This DVD player can play liner

PCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio for-

mat DVDs. Other decoded types cannot be

played.

Title and chapter: Video and audio pro-

grams stored in DVD video discs are divid-

ed into parts by title and chapter.

Title: The largest unit of the video and audio

programs stored on DVD video discs. Usu-

ally, one movie, one album, or one audio

program is assigned as a title.

Chapter: A unit smaller than that of title. A

title comprises of several chapters.

DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY

-Manufactured under license from Dolby

Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D

symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories.

-This product incorporates copyright

protection technology that is protected

by U.S. patents and other intellectual

property rights. Use of this copyright

protection technology must be

authorized by Rovi Corporation, and is

intended for home and other limited

viewing uses only unless otherwise

authorized by Rovi Corporation. Reverse

engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

254

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

8. USB MEMORY OPERATION

1Grip the knob to release the lock, and

lift the armrest to open.

2Open the cover and connect a USB

memory.

-Turn on the power of the USB memory if it

is not turned on.

3Close the console box.

Connecting a USB memory enables us-

ers to enjoy music from the vehicle

speakers.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the player’s controls or

connect the USB memory while driving.

NOTICE

●Depending on the size and shape of the

USB memory that is connected to the

system, the armrest may not close fully. In

this case, do not forcibly close the arm-

rest as this may damage the USB mem-

ory or the terminal, etc.

●Do not leave your portable player in the

car. In particular, high temperatures

inside the vehicle may damage the porta-

ble player.

●Do not push down on or apply unneces-

sary pressure to the portable player while

it is connected as this may damage the

portable player or its terminal.

●Do not insert foreign objects into the port

as this may damage the portable player

or its terminal.

CONNECTING A USB

MEMORY

255

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

1Press the “MEDIA” button if a USB

memory has already been connected.

2Select the “USB” tab or press the “ME-

DIA” button repeatedly until the “USB”

tab is selected.

-For the Remote Touch operation method,

see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNC-

TIONS” on page 211.

Tag mode

Folder mode

: Select to start playing the music.

: Select to pause the music.

-To start playing the music again, select .

PLAYING A USB MEMORY

PLAYING AND PAUSING A

USB MEMORY

INFORMATION

●If tag information exists, the file/folder

names will be changed to track/album

names.

INFORMATION

●When the USB memory is connected

and the audio source is changed to USB

memory mode, the USB memory will

start playing the first file in the first folder.

If the same device is removed and rein-

serted (and the contents have not been

changed), the USB memory will resume

playing from the same point it was last

used.

●Depending on the USB memory that is

connected to the system, certain func-

tions may not be available.

256

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

■ON THE USB TOP SCREEN

, : Select to skip to the next or previous

folder/album.

1Select the folder/album name screen

button.

2Select the desired tab and select the de-

sired folder, artist or album.

-Character screen buttons, “A B C ” , “DEF”

etc., allow a direct jump to list entries that

begin with the same letter as the character

button.

Each time the same character screen but-

ton is selected, the list starting with the sub-

sequent character is displayed.

, : Select to move the list up or down by

5 folder/artist/album groups. If either of

these screen buttons is selected when the

top/bottom page of the list is displayed, the

last/first page is displayed.

“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob

clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly

scroll up or down the folder/artist/album

list.

, : If appears to the right of an item

name, the complete name is too long for the

screen. Select to scroll to the end of the

name. Select to move to the beginning of

the name.

SELECTING A DESIRED

FOLDER/ALBUM

SELECTING A DESIRED

FOLDER, ARTIST OR ALBUM

257

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

■ON THE USB TOP SCREEN

, : Select to skip to the next or previous

file/track.

“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “” or

“” button of “PRST·TRACK” repeatedly

until the desired file/track number appears

on the screen. The player will start playing

the selected file/track from the beginning.

“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob

clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to

the desired file/track.

■ON THE FILE/TRACK LIST

SCREEN

1Select the file/track name screen button

to display the following file/track list

screen.

2Select the desired file/track number.

The player will start playing the selected

file/track from the beginning.

, : Select to move the list up or down by

5 file/track groups. If either of these screen

buttons is selected when the top/bottom

page of the list is displayed, the last/first

page is displayed.

“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “” or

“” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scroll

through the file/track list one by one.

“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob

clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly

scroll up or down the file/track list.

, : If appears to the right of an item

name, the complete name is too long for the

screen. Select to scroll to the end of the

name. Select to move to the beginning of

the name.

SELECTING A DESIRED FILE/

TRACK

258

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

■FAST FORWARDING OR RE-

WINDING

1Press and hold the “” or “” button of

“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or re-

wind the file/track.

-When the button is released, the player

resumes playing from that position.

■REPEATING A FILE/TRACK

1Select “RPT” while the file or track is

playing.

-Each time “RPT” is selected, the mode

changes as follows:

When “RAND” is off

• File/Track Repeat  Folder/Album

Repeat  Off

When “RAND” is on

• File/Track Repeat  Off

-“RPT” appears on the screen. When the

file/track is finished, the player will auto-

matically play it again. To cancel this func-

tion, select “RPT” repeatedly until the

repeat mode turns off.

■REPEATING A FOLDER/ALBUM

1Select “RPT” repeatedly until

“FLD.RPT” appears on the screen.

-When the folder/album is finished, the

player will automatically go back to the

beginning of the folder/album and play it

again. To cancel this function, select “RPT”

again.

REPEATING

The file or folder currently being listened

to can be repeated.

259

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

■PLAYING FILES/TRACKS IN RAN-

DOM ORDER

1Select “RAND” while the file or track is

playing.

-Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode

changes as follows:

•Random (1 Folder/Album Random) 

Folder/Album Random (All Folder/Album

Random)  Off

-Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the

system selects a file/track randomly from

the folder/album currently being listened to.

To cancel this function, select “RAND”

repeatedly until the random mode turns off.

■ALL FOLDER/ALBUM RANDOM

PLAY

1Select “RAND” repeatedly until

“FLD.RAND” appears on the screen.

-Once “FLD.RAND”/“ALB.RAND”

appears on the screen, the system selects a

file randomly from all of the existing folders

or albums. To cancel this function, select

“RAND” again.

RANDOM ORDER

Files or folders can be automatically and

randomly selected.

260

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

9. iPod OPERATION

1Grip the knob to release the lock, and

lift the armrest to open.

2Open the cover and connect iPod using

an iPod cable.

-Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not

turned on.

3Close the console box.

Connecting an iPod enables users to

enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the player’s controls or

connect the iPod while driving.

NOTICE

●Depending on the size and shape of the

iPod that is connected to the system, the

armrest may not close fully. In this case,

do not forcibly close the armrest as this

may damage the iPod or the terminal, etc.

●Do not leave your portable player in the

car. In particular, high temperatures

inside the vehicle may damage the porta-

ble player.

●Do not push down on or apply unneces-

sary pressure to the portable player while

it is connected as this may damage the

portable player or its terminal.

●Do not insert foreign objects into the port

as this may damage the portable player

or its terminal.

INFORMATION

●When an iPod is connected using a genu-

ine iPod cable, the iPod starts charging its

battery.

CONNECTING iPod

261

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

1Press the “MEDIA” button if an iPod has

already been connected.

2Select the “iPod” tab or press the “ME-

DIA” button repeatedly until the “iPod”

tab is selected.

-For the Remote Touch operation method,

see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNC-

TIONS” on page 211.

: Select to start playing the music.

: Select to pause the music.

-To start playing the music again, select .

1Select “Browse”.

PLAYING iPod

PLAYING AND PAUSING iPod

INFORMATION

●When the iPod connected to the system

includes iPod video, the system can only

output the sound by selecting “Video” on

the “iPod” screen.

●Depending on the iPod, the video sound

may not be able to be heard.

●Depending on the iPod and the songs in

the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed.

This function can be changed to “On” or

“Off”. See “iPod SETTINGS” on page

289. It may take time to display iPod

cover art, and the iPod may not be oper-

ated while the cover art display is in pro-

cess. Only the iPod cover art that is saved

in JPEG format can be displayed.

●When an iPod is connected and the audio

source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod

will resume playing from the same point it

was last used.

●Depending on the iPod that is connected

to the system, certain functions may not

be available.

SELECTING A PLAY MODE

262

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

2Select the desired play mode.

■ON THE iPod TOP SCREEN

, : Select to skip to the next or previous

track.

“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “” or

“” button of “PRST·TRACK” repeatedly

until the desired track number appears on

the screen. The player will start playing the

selected track from the beginning.

“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob

clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to

the desired track.

■ON THE TRACK LIST SCREEN

1Select the track name screen button to

display the following track list screen.

2Select the desired track number. The

player will start playing the selected

track from the beginning.

, : Select to move the list up or down by

5 track groups. If either of these screen but-

tons is selected when the top/bottom page

of the list is displayed, the last/first page is

displayed.

“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “” or

“” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scroll

through the track list one by one.

“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob

clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly

scroll up or down the track list.

, : If appears to the right of an item

name, the complete name is too long for the

screen. Select to scroll to the end of the

name. Select to move to the beginning of

the name.

SELECTING A DESIRED

TRACK

263

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

■FAST FORWARDING OR RE-

WINDING

1Press and hold the “” or “” button of

“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or re-

wind the player.

-When the button is released, the player

resumes playing from that position.

1Select “RPT” while the track is playing.

-“RPT” appears on the screen. When the

track is finished, the player will automati-

cally play it again. To cancel this function,

select “RPT” again.

■PLAYING TRACKS IN RANDOM

ORDER

1Select “RAND” while the track is play-

ing.

-Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode

changes as follows:

• Track Shuffle  Album Shuffle  Off

-Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the

system selects a track randomly from all of

the existing albums on the iPod. To cancel

this function, select “RAND” twice.

■PLAYING ALBUMS IN RANDOM

ORDER

1Select “RAND” repeatedly until

“ALB.RAND” appears on the screen.

-Once “ALB.RAND” appears on the screen,

the system selects an album randomly from

all of the existing albums on the iPod. To

cancel this function, select “RAND” again.

REPEATING

The track currently being listened to can

be repeated.

RANDOM ORDER

Tracks or albums can be automatically

and randomly selected.

264

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

10. Bluetooth® AUDIO OPERATION

Bluetooth is a trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

The Bluetooth® audio system enables

users to enjoy listening to music that is

played on a portable player on the vehi-

cle speakers via wireless communica-

tion.

This audio system supports Bluetooth®,

a wireless data system capable of play-

ing portable audio music without cables.

If your portable player does not support

Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio sys-

tem will not function.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the player’s controls or

connect to the Bluetooth® audio system

while driving.

●An antenna for the Bluetooth® connec-

tion is built in the instrument panel. Peo-

ple with implanted pacemakers or

cardiac defibrillators should maintain a

reasonable distance between them-

selves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The

radio waves may affect the operation of

such devices.

●Before using portable players, users of

any electrical medical device other than

implanted pacemakers and implanted

cardiac defibrillators should consult the

manufacturer of the device for informa-

tion about its operation under the influ-

ence of radio waves. Radio waves could

have unexpected effects on the operation

of such medical devices.

NOTICE

●Do not leave your portable player in the

vehicle. In particular, high temperatures

inside the vehicle may damage the porta-

ble player.

265

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

The quality of the Bluetooth® connection

is indicated as follows:

: An excellent connection to

Bluetooth®.

: Indicates a bad connection to

Bluetooth®, resulting in possible deteriora-

tion of audio quality.

: No connection to Bluetooth®.

Indicates the amount of battery charge

left.

INFORMATION

●In the following conditions, the system

may not function:

• The portable player is turned off.

• The portable player is not connected.

• The portable player has a low battery.

●It may take time to connect the phone

when Bluetooth® audio is being played.

●Portable players must correspond to the

following specifications in order to be

connected to the Bluetooth® audio sys-

tem. However, some functions may be

limited depending on the type of portable

player. Also, the different screen is dis-

played depending on which portable

player is connecting.

•Bluetooth

® Specification

Ver.1.1 or higher

(Recommended: Ver.2.1 + EDR or

higher)

• Profile

A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution

Profile) Ver.1.0 or higher

(Recommended: Ver.1.2 or higher)

AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control

Profile) Ver.1.0 or higher

(Recommended: Ver.1.4 or higher)

●Refer to http://www.lexus.com/ to find

approved Bluetooth® devices for this

system.

Empty Full

266

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

U.S.A.

INFORMATION

●Remaining charge is not displayed while

the Bluetooth® device is connecting.

●The amount of charge left does not

always correspond correctly with your

portable player.

●This system does not have a charging

function.

●An antenna for Bluetooth® connection is

built into the instrument panel. The condi-

tion of the Bluetooth® connection may

not be good and the system may not

function when using a Bluetooth® porta-

ble player in the following conditions:

•The portable player is obstructed by

certain objects (behind a seat or in the

glove box or console box).

• The portable player selects or is cov-

ered with metal materials.

●Leave the Bluetooth® portable player in

a place where the condition of

Bluetooth® connection is good.

-Portable player information is registered

when the portable player is connected to

the Bluetooth® audio system. When sell-

ing or disposing of the vehicle, remove

the Bluetooth® audio information from

the system. (See “DELETING A

Bluetooth® DEVICE” on page 196.)

-FCC ID : BABFT0033A

-This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

CAUTION

●FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

●CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation

Exposure

This equipment complies with FCC

radiation exposure limits set forth for

uncontrolled equipment and meets the

FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure

Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.

This equipment has very low levels of RF

energy that it deemed to comply without

maximum permissive exposure

evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it

should be installed and operated with at

least 20 cm and more between the

radiator and person’s body (excluding

extremities: hands, wrists, feet and

ankles).

●Co-location: This transmitter must not be

co-located or operated in conjunction

with any other antenna or transmitter.

267

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

Canada

-IC: 2024B-FT0033A

-This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS

standard(s). Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) this device

may not cause interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

-Le présent appareil est conforme aux

CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables

aux appareils radio exempts de licence.

L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux

conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit

pas produire de brouillage, et (2)

l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,

même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en

compromettre le fonctionnement.

CAUTION

●CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation

Exposure

This equipment complies with IC

radiation exposure limits set forth for

uncontrolled equipment and meets RSS-

102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)

Exposure rules. This equipment has very

low levels of RF energy that it deemed to

comply without maximum permissive

exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is

desirable that it should be installed and

operated with at least 20 cm and more

between the radiator and person’s body

(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet

and ankles).

●ATTENTION : Exposition aux radiations

des fréquences radioélectriques

Cet équipement se conforme aux limites

d’exposition aux radiations établies par

Industrie Canada pour un environnement

non contrôlé ainsi qu’aux directives

d’exposition aux fréquences

radioélectriques (RF) émises par

Industrie Canada dans la norme

CNR-102. Cet équipement émet un

niveau d’énergie RF faible à un point tel

qu’il se conforme sans devoir effectuer

d’évaluation d’exposition maximum

admissible (MPE). Lorsque l’équipement

est installé et utilisé, il est toutefois

souhaitable de laisser au moins 20 cm

entre l’antenne et le corps (à l’exception

des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et

chevilles).

●This Category II radiocommunication

device complies with Industry Canada

Standard RSS-310.

●Ce dispositif de radiocommunication de

catégorie II respecte la norme CNR-310

d’Industrie Canada.

268

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

-The portable player will be automatically

connected under the following conditions:

•The “START STOP ENGINE”

<“POWER”> switch is in either ACCES-

SORY or IGNITION ON <ON> mode.

•When “Bluetooth* Power” is switched

from off to on.

• When the portable player is discon-

nected for some reason.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

1Select “Connect”.

2Select the desired portable player.

3When the connection is completed, this

screen is displayed. It is now possible to

use the portable player.

CONNECTING A Bluetooth®

AUDIO PLAYER

To use the Bluetooth® audio system, it is

necessary to register a portable player

with the system. Once the portable play-

er has been registered, it is possible to

listen to the music.

Once the portable player has been reg-

istered, it is possible to listen to music

through the navigation system. (See

“REGISTERING A Bluetooth® DE-

VICE” on page 195.)

INFORMATION

●For operating the portable player, see the

instruction manual that comes with it.

WHEN “Bluetooth* Power” IS

OFF

Manually connect the portable player in

accordance with the following proce-

dure.

269

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

-If the Bluetooth® device is disconnected

on purpose, such as it was turned off, this

does not happen. Reconnect the portable

player manually.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

1Press the “MEDIA” button if a

Bluetooth® audio player has already

been connected.

2Select the “BT Audio” tab or press the

“MEDIA” button repeatedly until the

“BT Audio” tab is selected.

-For the Remote Touch operation method,

see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNC-

TIONS” on page 211.

: Select to start playing the music.

: Select to pause the music.

-To start playing the music again, select .

INFORMATION

●Selecting “Connect Portable Player” on

the “Bluetooth*” screen also connects a

Bluetooth® audio player. (See page

200.)

●When none of the selectable portable

players have been registered, a screen

confirming registration is displayed. Reg-

istration method is the same as phone

registration. (See page 152.)

●When the currently connected portable

player is selected, a screen confirming

the selected player’s disconnection is dis-

played. (See page 201.)

●If connection fails once, a changing con-

nection method confirmation screen is

displayed. If connection fails 2 or more

times, a message will be displayed. When

this message is displayed, try again.

RECONNECTING THE

PORTABLE PLAYER

If the portable player is disconnected

due to poor reception from the

Bluetooth® network when the “START

STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is

in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON

<ON> mode, the system automatically

reconnects the portable player.

PLAYING Bluetooth® AUDIO

PLAYING AND PAUSING

Bluetooth® AUDIO

270

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

-Depending on the portable player that is

connected to the system, the music may

start playing when selecting while it is

paused. Conversely, the music may pause

when selecting while it is playing.

■ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN

, : Select to skip to the next or previous

folder/album.

■ON THE PLAYLIST SCREEN

1Select the album name screen button to

display the following playlist screen.

2Select the desired screen button.

-If the folder name screen button is selected,

the track list screen is displayed.

3Select the desired track name screen

button.

, : Select to move the list up or down by

5 track/folder groups. If either of these

screen buttons is selected when the top/

bottom page of the list is displayed, the last/

first page is displayed.

“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “” or

“” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scroll

through the track list one by one.

“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob

clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly

scroll up or down the track/folder list.

, : If appears to the right of an item

name, the complete name is too long for the

screen. Select to scroll to the end of the

name. Select to move to the beginning of

the name.

SELECTING A DESIRED

TRACK/FOLDER/ALBUM

271

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

■FAST FORWARDING OR RE-

WINDING

1Press and hold the “” or “” button of

“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or re-

wind the song.

-When the button is released, the player

resumes playing from that position.

■ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN

, : Select to skip to the next or previous

track.

“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “” or

“” button of “PRST·TRACK” repeatedly

until the desired track number appears on

the screen. The player will start playing the

selected track from the beginning.

“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob

clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to

the desired track.

■ON THE TRACK LIST SCREEN

1Select the track name screen button to

display the following track list screen.

INFORMATION

●Depending on the portable player that is

connected to the system, certain func-

tions may not be available.

●Some titles may not be displayed

depending on the type of portable player.

SELECTING A DESIRED

TRACK

272

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

2Select the desired track number. The

player will start playing the selected

track from the beginning.

, : Select to move the list up or down by

5 track groups. If either of these screen but-

tons is selected when the top/bottom page

of the list is displayed, the last/first page is

displayed.

“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “” or

“” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scroll

through the track list one by one.

“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob

clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly

scroll up or down the track list.

, : If appears to the right of an item

name, the complete name is too long for the

screen. Select to scroll to the end of the

name. Select to move to the beginning of

the name.

■FAST FORWARDING OR RE-

WINDING

1Press and hold the “” or “” button of

“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or re-

wind the track.

-When the button is released, the player

resumes playing from that position.

INFORMATION

●Depending on the portable player that is

connected to the system, certain func-

tions may not be available.

273

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

■REPEATING A TRACK

1Select “RPT” while the track is playing.

-Each time “RPT” is selected, the mode

changes as follows:

•Track Repeat  Album Repeat  Off

-“RPT” appears on the screen. When the

track is finished, the player will automati-

cally play it again. To cancel this function,

select “RPT” repeatedly until the repeat

mode turns off.

■REPEATING AN ALBUM

1Select “RPT” repeatedly until

“ALB.RPT” appears on the screen.

-When the album is finished, the player will

automatically go back to the beginning of

the album and play it again. To cancel this

function, select “RPT” again.

■PLAYING THE TRACKS ON THE

ALBUM IN RANDOM ORDER

1Select “RAND” while the track is play-

ing.

-Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode

changes as follows:

•Album Random  All Track Random 

Off

-Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the

system selects a track randomly from the

album currently being listened to. To cancel

this function, select “RAND” repeatedly

until the random mode turns off.

REPEATING

The track or album currently being lis-

tened to can be repeated.

RANDOM ORDER

Tracks or albums can be automatically

and randomly selected.

274

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

■PLAYING TRACKS FROM ALL

THE ALBUMS IN RANDOM OR-

DER

1Select “RAND” repeatedly until

“ALB.RAND” appears on the screen.

-Once “ALB.RAND” appears on the screen,

the system selects a track randomly from all

of the existing albums on the Bluetooth®

device. To cancel this function, select

“RAND” again.

INFORMATION

●Depending on the portable player that is

connected to the system, certain func-

tions may not be available.

275

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

11. AUDIO/VIDEO REMOTE CONTROLS (STEERING SWITCHES)

Volume control switch

-Press the “+” side to increase the volume.

The volume continues to increase while the

switch is being pressed.

-Press the “-” side to decrease the volume.

The volume continues to decrease while

the switch is being pressed.

“ ” switch

Radio

To select a preset station/channel: Quickly

press and release the “” or “” switch. Re-

peat this to select the next preset station/

channel.

To seek a station/channel: Press and hold

the “” or “” switch until a beep is heard.

Repeat this to find the next station/channel.

If either switch is pressed during seek mode,

seeking will be canceled.

-To seek up or down the frequency, press

and hold the switch until a beep is heard.

When you release the switch, the radio will

begin seeking up or down for a station/

channel. Repeat to find the next station/

channel.

DVD player

-Use the “” or “” switch to skip up or

down to a different track, file or chapter in

either direction.

To select a desired track, file or chapter:

Quickly press and release the “” or “”

switch until the desired track, file or chapter

to play is selected. To return to the begin-

ning of the current track, file or chapter,

press the “” switch once quickly.

To select a desired folder: Press and hold

the “” or “” switch until a beep is heard to

change to the next or the previous folder.

Repeat it until the desired folder is selected.

Some parts of the audio/video system

can be adjusted using the switches on

the steering wheel.

No. Switch

Volume control switch

“” switch

“MODE” switch

Back switch

276

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

Bluetooth® audio player

-Use the “” or “” switch to skip up or

down to a different track or album in either

direction.

To s e l e c t a d e s i r e d t r a c k : Quickly press and

release the “” or “” switch until the de-

sired track is selected. To return to the be-

ginning of the current track, press the “”

switch once quickly.

To select a desired album: Press and hold

the “” or “” switch until a beep is heard to

change to the next or the previous album.

Repeat it until the desired album is selected.

USB memory/iPod

-Use the “” or “” switch to skip up or

down to a different file or track in either

direction.

To select a desired file or track: Press the

“” or “” switch until the desired file or

track is selected. To return to the beginning

of the current file or track, press the “”

switch once quickly.

To select a desired folder or album (USB

memory only): Press and hold the “” or

“” switch until a beep is heard to change to

the next or the previous folder or album. Re-

peat it until the desired folder or album is se-

lected.

“MODE” switch

-Press the “MODE” switch to select an

audio mode. Each press changes the mode

sequentially if the desired mode is ready to

use.

-To turn the audio/video system on, press

the “MODE” switch.

-Press and hold the “MODE” switch to

mute/unmute or pause/resume the current

operation.

Back switch

-Press the back switch to return to the previ-

ous screen.

277

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

12. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS

Fading and drifting stations: Generally, the

effective range of FM is about 25 miles (40

km). Once outside this range, you may no-

tice fading and drifting, which increase with

the distance from the radio transmitter.

They are often accompanied by distortion.

Multi-path: FM signals are reflective, mak-

ing it possible for 2 signals to reach the vehi-

cle’s antenna at the same time. If this

happens, the signals will cancel each other

out, causing a momentary flutter or loss of

reception.

Static and fluttering: These occur when sig-

nals are blocked by buildings, trees or other

large objects. Increasing the bass level may

reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping: If the FM signal being lis-

tened to is interrupted or weakened, and

there is another strong station nearby on

the FM band, the radio may tune in the sec-

ond station until the original signal can be

picked up again.

NOTICE

●To ensure correct audio/video system

operations:

• Be careful not to spill beverages over

the audio/video system.

• Do not put anything other than an

appropriate disc into the disc slot.

• The use of a cellular phone inside or

near the vehicle may cause a noise

from the speakers of the audio/video

system which you are listening to.

However, this does not indicate a mal-

function.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio reception

does not mean there is a problem with

the radio — it is just the normal result of

conditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and ter-

rain can interfere with FM reception.

Power lines or phone wires can interfere

with AM signals. And of course, radio

signals have a limited range. The farther

the vehicle is from a station, the weaker

its signal will be. In addition, reception

conditions change constantly as the ve-

hicle moves.

Here, some common reception prob-

lems that probably do not indicate a

problem with the radio are described.

278

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by the

upper atmosphere — especially at night.

These reflected signals can interfere with

those received directly from the radio sta-

tion, causing the radio station to sound al-

ternately strong and weak.

Station interference: When a reflected sig-

nal and a signal received directly from a ra-

dio station are very nearly the same

frequency, they can interfere with each oth-

er, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.

Static: AM is easily affected by external

sources of electrical noise, such as high ten-

sion power lines, lightening or electrical

motors. This results in static.

-Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier,

especially metal objects, may adversely

affect the reception of XM Satellite Radio.

-Alternation or modifications carried out

without appropriate authorization may

invalidate the user’s right to operate the

equipment.

-“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone”

mean that an electronic accessory has

been designed to connect specifically to

iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been

certified by the developer to meet Apple

performance standards.

-Apple is not responsible for the operation

of this device or its compliance with safety

and regulatory standards. Please note that

the use of this accessory with iPod or

iPhone may affect wireless performance.

-iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and

iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

iPod

279

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPod

classic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devic-

es can be used with this system.

Made for

• iPod touch (4th generation)

•iPod touch (3rd generation)

• iPod touch (2nd generation)

• iPod touch (1st generation)

• iPod classic

•iPod with video

• iPod nano (6th generation)

• iPod nano (5th generation)

• iPod nano (4th generation)

• iPod nano (3rd generation)

• iPod nano (2nd generation)

• iPod nano (1st generation)

•iPhone 4

•iPhone 3GS

•iPhone 3G

•iPhone

Depending on differences between models

or software versions etc., some models

might be incompatible with this system.

-USB memory that can be used for MP3

and WMA playback:

• USB communication formats: USB 2.0

HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)

• File formats: FAT 16/32

• Correspondence class: Mass storage

class

-This DVD player is intended for use with

4.7 in. (12 cm) discs only.

-Extremely high temperatures can keep the

DVD player from working. On hot days,

use the air conditioning system to cool the

inside of the vehicle before using the player.

-Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make

the DVD player skip.

-If moisture gets into the DVD player, the

discs may not be able to be played. Remove

the discs from the player and wait until it

dries.

COMPATIBLE MODELS USB MEMORY

CARING FOR YOUR DVD

PLAYER AND DISC

CAUTION

●DVD players use an invisible laser beam

which could cause hazardous radiation

exposure if directed outside the unit. Be

sure to operate the player correctly.

280

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

-Use only discs marked as shown above.

The following products may not be playable

on your player:

•SACD

•dts CD

•Copy-protected CD

•DVD audio

•Video CD

•DVD+R

•DVD+RW

•DVD-RAM

Special shaped discs

Transparent/translucent discs

Low quality discs

Labeled discs

DVD PLAYER

Audio CDs

DVD video

discs

281

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

-Handle discs carefully, especially when

inserting them. Hold them on the edge and

do not bend them. Avoid getting finger-

prints on them, particularly on the shiny

side.

-Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or other

disc damage could cause the player to skip

or to repeat a section of a track. (To see a

pin hole, hold the disc up to the light.)

-Remove discs from the players when not in

use. Store them in their plastic cases away

from moisture, heat and direct sunlight.

To c l e a n a d i s c : Wipe it with a soft, lint-free

cloth that has been dampened with water.

Wipe in a straight line from the center to the

edge of the disc (not in circles). Dry it with

another soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use a

conventional record cleaner or anti-static

device.

-MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA

(Windows Media Audio) are audio com-

pression standards.

-The MP3/WMA player can play MP3 and

WMA files on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-

RW discs.

-The unit can play disc recordings compati-

ble with ISO 9660 level 1 and level 2 and

with the Romeo and Joliet file system.

-When naming an MP3 or WMA file, add

the appropriate file extension (.mp3 or

.wma ).

-The MP3/WMA player plays back files

with .mp3 or .wma file extensions as MP3

or WMA files. To prevent noise and play-

back errors, use the appropriate file exten-

sions.

-The MP3/WMA player can play only the

first session when using multi-session com-

patible CDs.

NOTICE

●Do not use special shaped, transparent/

translucent, low quality or labeled discs

such as those shown in the illustrations.

The use of such discs may damage the

player, or it may be impossible to eject the

disc.

●This system is not designed for use of

Dual Discs. Do not use Dual Discs

because they may cause damage to the

player.

●Do not use discs with a protection ring.

The use of such discs may damage the

player, or it may be impossible to eject the

disc.

Correct Wrong

MP3/WMA FILES

282

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

-MP3 player: MP3 files are compatible with

the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and

Ver. 2.3 formats. The unit cannot display

disc title, track title and artist name in other

formats.

-USB memory: MP3 files are compatible

with the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2,

Ver. 2.3 and Ver. 2.4 formats. The unit can-

not display track title and artist name in

other formats.

-WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is

used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA

tags carry information such as track title

and artist name.

-The emphasis function is available only

when playing MP3/WMA files recorded at

32, 44.1 and 48 kHz.

-MP3 files for MP3 player:

MPEG 1 LAYER 3 — 32, 44.1, 48 kHz

MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 — 16, 22.05, 24

kHz

MP3 files for USB memory:

MPEG 1 AUDIO LAYER 2, 3 — 32, 44.1,

48 kHz

MPEG 2 AUDIO LAYER 2, 3 — 16, 22.05,

24 kHz

WMA files for WMA player:

Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 32, 44.1, 48

kHz

WMA files for USB memory:

Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 32, 44.1, 48

kHz

-The sound quality of MP3/WMA files gen-

erally improves with higher bit rates. In

order to achieve a reasonable level of

sound quality, discs recorded with a bit rate

of at least 128 kbps are recommended.

-MP3 files for MP3 player:

MPEG1 LAYER3 — 32 to 320 kbps

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3 — 8 to 160 kbps

MP3 files for USB memory:

MPEG 1 AUDIO LAYER 3 — 32 to 320

kbps

MPEG 2 AUDIO LAYER 3 — 8 to 160

kbps

WMA files for WMA player:

Ver. 7, 8 CBR — 48 to 192 kbps

Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 48 to 320 kbps

(VBR*)

WMA files for USB memory:

Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 48 to 320 kbps

(VBR*)

*: Variable Bit Rate

-The MP3/WMA player does not play back

MP3/WMA files from discs recorded

using packet write data transfer (UDF for-

mat). Discs should be recorded using “pre-

mastering” software rather than packet-

write software.

-M3u playlists are not compatible with the

audio player.

-MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO

formats are not compatible with the audio

player.

-The player is compatible with VBR (Vari-

able Bit Rate).

-When playing back files recorded as VBR

(Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time will

not be correctly displayed if the fast for-

ward or reverse operations are used.

SAMPLING FREQUENCY

PLAYABLE BIT RATES

283

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

-It is not possible to check folders that do not

include MP3/WMA files.

-MP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 levels

deep can be played. However, the start of

playback may be delayed when using discs

containing numerous levels of folders. For

this reason, we recommend creating discs

with no more than 2 levels of folders.

-The play order of the compact disc with the

structure shown above is as follows:

-MP3/WMA player: It is possible to play up

to 192 folders or 255 files on one disc.

-USB memory: It is possible to play up to

3000 folders, 255 files per folder or

9999 files in the device.

-The order changes depending on the per-

sonal computer and MP3/WMA encoding

software you use.

-CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been

subject to the “finalizing process” (a pro-

cess that allows discs to be played on a

conventional CD player) cannot be played.

-It may not be possible to play CD-R/CD-

RW discs recorded on a music CD

recorder or a personal computer because

of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on

the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the

lens of the unit.

-It may not be possible to play discs

recorded on a personal computer depend-

ing on the application settings and the envi-

ronment. Record with the correct format.

(For details, contact the appropriate appli-

cation manufacturers of the applications.)

-CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged by

direct exposure to sunlight, high tempera-

tures or other storage conditions. The unit

may be unable to play some damaged

discs.

-If you insert a CD-RW disc into the MP3/

WMA player, playback will begin more

slowly than with a conventional CD or CD-

R disc.

-Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot be

played using the DDCD (Double Density

CD) system.

001.mp3

002.wma

Folder 1

003.mp3

Folder 2

004.mp3

005.wma

Folder 3

006.mp3

001.mp3 002.wma . . . 006.mp3

CD-R AND CD-RW DISCS

284

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

-This is a general term that describes the

process of writing data on-demand to CD-

R, etc., in the same way that data is written

to floppy or hard discs.

-This is a method of embedding track-

related information in an MP3 file. This

embedded information can include the

track title, the artist’s name, the album title,

the music genre, the year of production,

comments and other data. The contents

can be freely edited using software with

ID3 tag editing functions. Although the

tags are restricted to a number of charac-

ters, the information can be viewed when

the track is played back.

-WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is

used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA

tags carry information such as track title

and artist name.

-This is the international standard for the for-

matting of CD-ROM folders and files. For

the ISO 9660 format, there are 2 levels of

regulations.

-Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (8

character file names, with a 3 character file

extension. File names must be composed of

one-byte capital letters and numbers. The

“_” symbol may also be included.)

-Level 2: The file name can have up to 31

characters (including the separation mark

“.” and file extension). Each folder must

contain fewer than 8 hierarchies.

-Playlists created using “WINAMP” soft-

ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u).

-MP3 is an audio compression standard

determined by a working group (MPEG) of

the ISO (International Standard Organiza-

tion). MP3 compresses audio data to about

1/10 the size of that on conventional discs.

-WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio

compression format developed by

Microsoft®. It compresses files into a size

smaller than that of MP3 files. The decod-

ing formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8 and

TERMS

PACKET WRITE

ID3 TAG

WMA TAG

ISO 9660 FORMAT

m3u

MP3

WMA

285

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

-Music recognition technology and

related data are provided by

Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry

standard in music recognition

technology and related content delivery.

For more information visit

www.gracenote.com.

-CD and music-related data from

present Gracenote. Gracenote

Gracenote. One or more patents owned

by Gracenote apply to this product and

service. See the Gracenote website for a

non-exhaustive list of applicable

Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB,

MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote

logo and logotype, and the “Powered by

Gracenote” logo are either registered

trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote

in the United States and/or other

countries.

-Gracenote® End User License

Agreement

This application or device contains

software from Gracenote, Inc. of

Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”).

The software from Gracenote (the

“Gracenote Software”) enables this

application to perform disc and/or file

identification and obtain music-related

information, including name, artist,

track, and title information (“Gracenote

Data”) from online servers or

embedded databases (collectively,

“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform

other functions. You may use

Gracenote Data only by means of the

intended End-User functions of this

application or device.

You agree that you will use Gracenote

Data, the Gracenote Software, and

Gracenote Servers for your own

personal non-commercial use only.

You agree not to assign, copy, transfer

or transmit the Gracenote Software or

any Gracenote Data to any third party.

YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR

EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE

GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR

GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT

AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED

HEREIN.

286

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

You agree that your non-exclusive

license to use the Gracenote Data, the

Gracenote Software, and Gracenote

Servers will terminate if you violate

these restrictions. If your license

terminates, you agree to cease any and

all use of the Gracenote Data, the

Gracenote Software, and Gracenote

Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights

in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote

Software, and the Gracenote Servers,

including all ownership rights. Under no

circumstances will Gracenote become

liable for any payment to you for any

information that you provide. You

agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce

its rights under this Agreement against

you directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses a unique

identifier to track queries for statistical

purposes. The purpose of a randomly

assigned numeric identifier is to allow

the Gracenote service to count queries

without knowing anything about who

you are. For more information, see the

web page for the Gracenote Privacy

Policy for the Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and each item

of Gracenote Data are licensed to you

“AS IS.” Gracenote makes no

representations or warranties, express

or implied, regarding the accuracy of

any Gracenote Data from in the

Gracenote Servers. Gracenote

reserves the right to delete data from

the Gracenote Servers or to change

data categories for any cause that

Gracenote deems sufficient. No

warranty is made that the Gracenote

Software or Gracenote Servers are

error-free or that functioning of

Gracenote Software or Gracenote

Servers will be uninterrupted.

Gracenote is not obligated to provide

you with new enhanced or additional

data types or categories that

Gracenote may provide in the future

and is free to discontinue its services at

any time.

287

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:20

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL

WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR

A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE,

AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.

GRACENOTE DOES NOT

WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT

WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE

OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE

OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN

NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE

LIABLE FOR ANY

CONSEQUENTIAL OR

INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR

ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST

REVENUES.

Gracenote

288

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.04.18 16:48

2. SETUP

1. AUDIO SETTINGS

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Setup”.

3Select “A u d i o ” .

4Select “HD Radio Settings”.

5Select “HD Radio/Analog Setting”.

6Select the item to be set.

7Select “Save”.

HD Radio™ SYSTEM SETTINGS

HD Radio™ system can be set using the

procedure outlined below.

Screen button Function

“All” Select to receive both ana-

log and digital broadcasts.

“HD Only” Select to receive only digi-

tal broadcasts.

“Analog” Select to receive only ana-

log broadcasts.

289

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.04.18 16:48

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Setup”.

3Select “A u d i o ” .

4Select “iPod Settings”.

5Select “Display Cover Art”.

6Select “On” or “Off”.

iPod SETTINGS

iPod can be set using the procedure out-

lined below.

COVER ART DISPLAY

SETTINGS

When the track currently being played

has cover art data, it can be displayed.

290

2. SETUP

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.04.18 16:48

291

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.04.18 16:48

1. QUICK REFERENCE ........................... 292

2. SOME BASICS ........................................ 294

CLIMATE CONTROL ........................................ 294

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM...................... 294

3. AUTOMATIC AIR

CONDITIONING SYSTEM ............ 295

USING THE AUTOMATIC AIR

CONDITIONING SYSTEM......................... 295

ADJUST THE SETTINGS

MANUALLY......................................................... 296

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

OPERATING HINTS........................................ 302

1AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

OPERATION

AIR CONDITIONING

292

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION

1. QUICK REFERENCE

*1: Driver side temperature display

*2: Outside temperature display

*3: Passenger side temperature display

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Climate” to display the

air conditioning control screen.

No. Name Function Page

Driver’s side tempera-

ture control button

Press/select to control the driver’s side tempera-

ture. 296

Fan speed control but-

tons Press/select to change fan speed. 297

*3*1

293

1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION

AIR CONDITIONING

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

Air flow control buttons Press/select to change the air outlets. 298

Passenger’s side tem-

perature control button

Press/select to control the passenger’s side tem-

perature.

When you press/select this button, the “DUAL”

indicator light will turn on, and the mode will

change to independent mode.

296

Windshield wiper de-

icer (If equipped)

Select to prevent ice from building up on the wind-

shield and wiper blades. 301

(Micro dust and

pollen filter button) Select to remove micro dust and pollen. 302

Windshield air flow

button Press to defog the windshield. 297

Rear window and out-

side rear view mirror

defogger button

Press to defog the rear window and outside rear

view mirror. 301

“DUAL” button/

“DUAL”

Press/select to set the temperatures indepen-

dently for the driver’s, and front passenger’s seat. 296

Air intake control but-

ton

Press to change the function between outside air,

recirculated air and automatic mode. 299

“AUTO” button Press to use the automatic air conditioning sys-

tem. 295

“OFF” button Press to turn the fan off. 295,

297

“A/C” Select to change the air conditioning between on

and off. 302

No. Name Function Page

294

1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

2. SOME BASICS

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Climate”.

CLIMATE CONTROL

The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POW-

ER”> switch must be in IGNITION ON

<ON> mode.

-A function that enables automatic return

to the previous screen from the air condi-

tioning control screen can be selected.

See page 51 for details.

NOTICE

●To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, do

not leave the air conditioning system on

longer than necessary when the engine

<hybrid system> is stopped.

INFORMATION

●During use, various odors from inside and

outside the vehicle may enter into and

accumulate in the air conditioning sys-

tem. This may then cause odor to be

emitted from the vents.

●To reduce potential odors from occur-

ring:

• It is recommended that the air condi-

tioning system be set to outside air

mode prior to turning the vehicle off.

• The start timing of the blower may be

delayed for a short period of time

immediately after the air conditioning

system is started in automatic operation

mode.

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

Press this switch to operate the voice

command system.

-For the operation of the voice command

system and the list of commands, see

pages 308 and 317.

295

1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

AIR CONDITIONING

3. AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

1Press the “A U TO ” button.

2Press the air intake control button to

switch to automatic air intake mode.

Using the instrument panel

3Press the “” button on “TEMP” to in-

crease the temperature and “” to de-

crease the temperature.

Using the screen

3Select “” (increase) or “” (decrease).

Left-hand front seat side tempera-

ture control

Right-hand front seat side tempera-

ture control

-The temperature for the driver’s and front

passenger’s seats can be set separately.

-Only the “” and “” buttons on “TEMP”

(driver’s side) can be used to adjust the

temperature for all seats.

USING THE AUTOMATIC AIR

CONDITIONING SYSTEM

Air outlets and fan speed are automati-

cally adjusted according to the temper-

ature setting.

-The air conditioning system automati-

cally switches between outside air and

recirculated air modes.

-Press the “OFF” button to turn the fan off.

296

1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

Using the instrument panel

1Press the “” button on “TEMP” to in-

crease the temperature and “” to de-

crease the temperature.

Using the screen

1Select “” (increase) or “” (decrease).

Left-hand front seat side tempera-

ture control

Right-hand front seat side tempera-

ture control

-The temperature for the driver’s and front

passenger’s seats can be set separately.

-Only the “” and “” buttons on “TEMP”

(driver’s side) can be used to adjust the

temperature for all seats.

■DUAL

Using the instrument panel

1Press the “DUAL” button.

Using the screen

1Select “DUAL”.

-When the indicator on “DUAL” is on, the

temperature for the driver’s and front pas-

senger’s seats can be set separately.

ADJUST THE SETTINGS

MANUALLY

SETTING THE VEHICLE

INTERIOR TEMPERATURE

“DUAL” is used to set the temperatures

independently for the driver’s seat and

front passenger seat.

297

1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION

AIR CONDITIONING

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

Using the instrument panel

1Press the button on fan speed con-

trol button to increase the fan speed and

press the button to decrease the fan

speed. (7 levels)

Using the screen

1Select “” on to increase the fan

speed and “” to decrease the fan

speed. (7 levels)

1Press the windshield air flow button.

-The air conditioning system control oper-

ates automatically.

-Recirculated air mode will automatically

switch to outside air mode.

SETTING THE FAN SPEED

-Press the “OFF” button to turn the fan off.

DEFOGGING THE

WINDSHIELD

CAUTION

●To prevent the windshield from fogging

• Do not use the windshield air flow but-

ton during cool air operation in

extremely humid weather. The differ-

ence between the temperature of the

outside air and that of the windshield

can cause the outer surface of the wind-

shield to fog up, blocking your vision.

298

1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

Using the instrument panel

1Press the air outlet selector button.

Using the screen

1Select any mode on the screen.

Air flows to the upper body (Panel)

Air flows to the upper body and feet (Bi-

level)

SWITCHING THE AIR

OUTLETS AND AIR FLOW

The outlets from which air is delivered

can be selected manually.

No. Function

Panel

Bi-level

Floor

Floor/windshield

299

1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION

AIR CONDITIONING

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

Air flows to the feet (Floor)

Air flows to the feet and the windshield

defogger operates (Floor/windshield)

1Press the air intake control button.

-When the system is switched to automatic

mode, the air conditioning system operates

automatically.

SWITCHING BETWEEN

OUTSIDE AIR AND

RECIRCULATED AIR MODES

The mode switches among recirculated

air mode, “A U TO ” mode and outside air

mode each time the button is pressed.

No. Function

Recirculated air mode

“AUTO” mode

Outside air mode

300

1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

Front center outlets

Front side outlets

Rear center outlets

ADJUSTING THE POSITION

OF AND OPENING AND

CLOSING THE AIR OUTLETS

No. Function

Direct air flow to the left or right, up

or down

No. Function

Direct air flow to the left or right, up

or down

Turn the knob to open or close the

vent

No. Function

Direct air flow to the left or right, up

or down

Turn the knob to open or close the

vent

301

1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION

AIR CONDITIONING

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the rear window and outside rear

view mirror defogger button.

-The defoggers will automatically turn off

after 15 to 60 minutes. The operation time

changes according to the ambient temper-

ature and vehicle speed.

1Select windshield wiper de-icer.

-The windshield wiper de-icer will automati-

cally turn off after approximately 15 min-

utes.

REAR WINDOW AND

OUTSIDE REAR VIEW

MIRROR DEFOGGERS

These features are used to defog the

rear window, and to remove raindrops,

dew and frost from the outside rear view

mirrors.

The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POW-

ER”> switch must be in IGNITION ON

<ON> mode.

CAUTION

●When the outside rear view mirror

defoggers are on, do not touch the rear

view mirror surfaces, as they can become

very hot and burn you.

NOTICE

●To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, turn

the defoggers off when the engine is off.

WINDSHIELD WIPER

DE-ICER*

This feature is used to prevent ice from

building up on the windshield and wiper

blades.

The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POW-

ER”> switch must be in IGNITION ON

<ON> mode.

CAUTION

●When the windshield wiper de-icer is on,

do not touch the glass at the lower part of

the windshield or to the side of the front

pillars as the surfaces can become very

hot and burn you.

*: If equipped

302

1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Select .

-Usually the system will turn off automati-

cally after approximately 1 to 3 minutes.

-In the Eco drive mode, the air conditioning

system is controlled as follows to prioritize

fuel efficiency:

• Engine speed and compressor operation

controlled to restrict heating/cooling

capacity

• Fan speed restricted when automatic

mode is selected

-To improve air conditioning performance,

perform the following operations:

• Adjust the fan speed and temperature

• Turn off Eco drive mode (refer to

“Owner’s Manual”.)

-Unlocking the vehicle using an electronic

key and turning the “START STOP

ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNI-

TION ON <ON> mode will recall that key’s

registered air conditioning settings.

-When the “START STOP ENGINE”

<“POWER”> switch is turned off, the cur-

rent air conditioning settings will automati-

cally be registered to the electronic key

that was used to unlock the vehicle.

The system may not operate correctly if

more than one electronic key is in the vicin-

ity or if the smart access system with push

button start is used to unlock a passenger

door.

Settings for the electronic key and the cor-

responding door can be changed. Contact

your Lexus dealer.

MICRO DUST AND POLLEN

FILTER

Outside air mode switches to recirculat-

ed air mode. Pollen is removed from the

air that flows to the upper part of the

body.

-To stop the operation, select again.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

OPERATING HINTS

OPERATION OF THE AIR

CONDITIONING SYSTEM IN

ECO DRIVE MODE (HYBRID

VEHICLE)

REGISTERING AIR

CONDITIONING SETTINGS

TO ELECTRONIC KEYS

303

1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION

AIR CONDITIONING

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

-Fan speed is adjusted automatically

according to the temperature setting and

the ambient conditions.

-Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until

warm or cool air is ready to flow immedi-

ately after “A U T O ” is pressed.

-The windows will easily fog up when the

humidity in the vehicle is high. Selecting

“A / C ” on will dehumidify the air from the

outlets and defog the windshield effectively.

-If “A /C ” is switched off, the windows may

fog up more easily.

-The windows may fog up if the recirculated

air mode is used.

-When automatic mode is set, the humidity

sensor (see page 305) detects fog on the

windshield and controls the air condition-

ing system to prevent fog.

-When driving on dusty roads such as tun-

nels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/

recirculated air mode button to the recircu-

lated air mode. This is effective in prevent-

ing outside air from entering the vehicle

interior. During cooling operation, setting

the recirculated air mode will also cool the

vehicle interior effectively.

-Outside/recirculated air mode may auto-

matically switch depending on the temper-

ature setting or the inside temperature.

USING AUTOMATIC MODE

FOGGING UP OF THE

WINDOWS

CAUTION

●To prevent the windshield from fogging

• Do not use the windshield air flow but-

ton during cool air operation in

extremely humid weather. The differ-

ence between the temperature of the

outside air and that of the windshield

can cause the outer surface of the wind-

shield to fog up, blocking your vision.

WINDSHIELD FOG

DETECTION FUNCTION*

OUTSIDE/RECIRCULATED

AIR MODE

*: If equipped

304

1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

-In order to reduce the air conditioning

power consumption, the air conditioning

system may switch to recirculated air mode

automatically. This may also reduce fuel

consumption.

-Recirculated air mode is selected as a

default mode when the “START STOP

ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to

IGNITION ON <ON> mode.

-It is possible to switch to outside air mode at

any time by pressing the air intake control

button.

-In automatic mode, the system detects

exhaust gas and other pollutants and auto-

matically switches between outside air and

recirculated air modes.

When the dehumidification function is off,

and the fan is operating, turning automatic

mode on will activate the dehumidification

function.

-In order to prevent the windshield from fog-

ging up when the outside air is cold, the fol-

lowing may occur:

• Outside air mode does not switch to

recirculated air mode.

• The dehumidification function operates.

• The operation cancels after approxi-

mately 1 minute.

-In rainy weather, the windows may fog up.

Press the windshield air flow button.

-In extremely humid weather, the windows

may fog up.

-The pollens are filtered out even if is

turned off.

-In the following situations, the correct out-

side temperature may not be displayed, or

the display may take longer than normal to

change.

• When stopped, or driving at low speeds

(less than 12 mph [20 km/h])

• When the outside temperature has

changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of

a garage, tunnel, etc.)

WHEN THE OUTSIDE

TEMPERATURE EXCEEDS

75°F (24°C) AND THE AIR

CONDITIONING SYSTEM IS

AUTOMATIC MODE FOR AIR

INTAKE CONTROL

MICRO DUST AND POLLEN

FILTER

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE

305

1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION

AIR CONDITIONING

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

-The dehumidification function may not

operate even when “A /C ” is selected.

-During use, various odors from inside and

outside the vehicle may enter into and

accumulate in the air conditioning system.

This may then cause odor to be emitted

from the vents.

-To reduce potential odors from occurring:

• It is recommended that the air condition-

ing system be set to outside air mode

prior to turning the vehicle off.

• The start timing of the blower may be

delayed for a short period of time imme-

diately after the air conditioning system is

started in automatic mode.

-The air conditioning filter may clog after

long use. The filter may need to be

replaced if the air flow of the air conditioner

and heater experiences extreme reduc-

tions in operating efficiency, or if the win-

dows fog up easily. (For details, refer to

“Owner’s Manual”.)

-Settings can be changed. (For details, refer

to “Owner’s Manual”.)

WHEN THE OUTSIDE

TEMPERATURE FALLS TO

NEARLY 32°F (0°C)

AIR CONDITIONING ODORS

AIR CONDITIONING FILTER

CUSTOMIZATION

HUMIDITY SENSOR*

NOTICE

●In order to detect fog on the windshield, a

sensor which monitors the temperature

of the windshield, the surround humidity,

etc. is installed. (See page 303.)

Follow these points to avoid damaging

the sensor:

• Do not disassemble the sensor

• Do not spray the glass cleaner on the

sensor or subject it to strong impacts

• Do not stick anything on the sensor

*: If equipped

306

1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

307

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.04.18 16:48

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM......... 308

STEERING SWITCHES FOR THE

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM.................. 308

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

OPERATION ....................................................... 308

2. NATURAL SPEECH

INFORMATION

(ENGLISH ONLY)................................ 314

3. EXPANDED VOICE

COMMANDS........................................ 316

4. COMMAND LIST.................................... 317

1VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

OPERATION

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

308

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

Talk switch

-Press the talk switch to start the voice com-

mand system.

-To cancel voice recognition, press and hold

the talk switch.

Back switch

-Press the back switch to return to the previ-

ous screen.

1Press the talk switch.

-After the “Shortcut Menu” screen has been

displayed, voice guidance will commence.

2After a beep sounds, say the command

of your choice.

-Voice commands are marked with .

Some commonly used commands are dis-

played on the screen.

-By saying “Next page” or “Previous page”,

or by selecting “Next Pg.”/“Prev. Pg.”, the

screen will display the commands dis-

played on the page in the background.

-Saying “Main menu” or selecting “Main

Menu” when the “Shortcut Menu” screen

is displayed will display the “Main Menu”

screen.

-Registered POIs, registered names in the

phonebook etc., can be said in the place of

the “<>” next to the commands. (See page

317.)

For example: Say “Find nearby dining”,

“Call John” etc.

The voice command system enables the

navigation, audio/video, hands-free and

air conditioning systems to be operated

using voice commands.

The operating procedures of voice

commands from the “Shortcut Menu”

screen are explained here.

INFORMATION

●Commands that are not displayed in the

“Shortcut Menu” screen can be operated

from the “Main Menu” screen.

STEERING SWITCHES FOR

THE VOICE COMMAND

SYSTEM

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

OPERATION

-Voice guidance for the voice command

system can be skipped by pressing the

talk switch.

309

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

3Say the command displayed on the

screen.

-If a desired outcome is not shown, or if no

selections are available, perform one of the

following to return to the previous screen:

•Say “Go back”.

•Select “Go Back”.

• Press the back switch on the steering

wheel.

-To cancel voice recognition, select “Can-

cel”, or press and hold the talk switch.

-Saying “Help” prompts voice guidance to

offer examples of commands and opera-

tion methods.

INFORMATION

●If the navigation system does not respond

or the confirmation screen does not dis-

appear, press the talk switch and try

again.

●If a voice command cannot be recog-

nized within 6 seconds, voice guidance

will say “Pardon?” (“Command not rec-

ognized.” will be displayed on the screen)

and voice command reception will

restart.

●If a voice command cannot be recog-

nized 2 consecutive times, the voice

command guidance system will say

“Paused. To restart voice recognition,

push the talk switch. To cancel voice rec-

ognition, push and hold the talk switch.”

Voice recognition will then be sus-

pended. Select “Cancel” or “Go Back”,

or press the back switch on the steering

wheel.

●The voice recognition prompt can be set

to on or off when “Voice Prompts” is

selected. This setting can also be

changed on the “Voice Settings” screen.

(See page 62.)

●When “Voice Prompts” is selected, voice

recognition will be temporarily sus-

pended. Press the talk switch again.

●Voice guidance can be canceled by set-

ting voice prompts to off. Use this setting

when it is desirable to say a command

immediately after pressing the talk switch

and hearing a beep.

310

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the talk switch.

2Say “Go home”.

-A confirmation screen will be displayed

showing the recognition results.

3Say “Yes” or select “Yes”.

-The system starts searching for a route to

your home.

-When the voice command is recognized,

the map of the area around the home

address will be displayed and route guid-

ance to the home address will begin.

MICROPHONE

It is unnecessary to speak directly into

the microphone when giving a com-

mand.

INFORMATION

●Wait for the confirmation beep before

speaking a command.

●Voice commands may not be recognized

if:

• Spoken too quickly.

• Spoken at a low or high volume.

• The roof or windows are open.

• Passengers are talking while voice com-

mands are spoken.

• The air conditioning speed is set high.

• The air conditioning vents are turned

towards the microphone.

●In the following conditions, the system

may not recognize the command prop-

erly and using voice commands may not

be possible:

• The command is incorrect or unclear.

Note that certain words, accents or

speech patterns may be difficult for the

system to recognize.

• There is excessive background noise,

such as wind noise.

VOICE COMMAND

EXAMPLE: SEARCHING FOR

A ROUTE TO YOUR HOME

-If a home address is not registered, voice

guidance will say “Your home is not set.

Please try again after setting a home

location.” and you will be prompted to

enter a home address. (See page 109.)

311

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the talk switch.

2Say “Enter an address”.

-If the destination’s state/province has not

been set or is not contained in the voice

command recognition list, the screen to

input a state/province will be displayed.

-Some areas cannot be recognized by the

voice recognition system.

3Say “<city name>”.

-Say the desired city name that belongs to

the set state in the place of the “<>”.

-Say “Change State” to change the set voice

recognition state.

4Say “<street name>”.

-Say the desired full street name, or main

body of the street name that belongs to the

set state in the place of the “<>”.

-The voice command recognition is

designed to recognize the main body of the

official street name.

For example, if the official street name is

“East Main Street”, the voice command rec-

ognition will recognize “Main”.

5Say “<house number>”.

-Say the desired number, cardinal/intercar-

dinal direction etc. in the place of the “<>”.

For example: Say “West 555”.

-Inputting the house number can be

skipped.

6Say “Start guidance” or “Show map”. Al-

ternatively, select “Start Guidance” or

“Show Map”.

-After this, follow the voice guidance and

search for a destination route by voice

command operation.

VOICE COMMAND

EXAMPLE: PERFORMING A

DESTINATION SEARCH BY

ADDRESS

-For information regarding the state/

province setting to perform a destination

search by address, see “SELECTING

THE SEARCH AREA” on page 68.

312

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the talk switch.

-“Play Artist <name>” and “Play Album

<name>” are displayed in the “Shortcut

Menu” screen.

2Say “Play artist <name>” or “Play album

<name>”.

-Say the desired artist name or album name

in the place of the “<>”.

-A confirmation screen will be displayed

showing the recognition results. If multiple

matching items are found, a selection

screen will be displayed.

3Say “Yes” or select “Yes”.

-The system starts playing music.

INFORMATION

●Even if the state set using voice recogni-

tion is different from the set state in the

“Address” screen (which was set when a

destination was set manually), the set

state in the “Address” screen will not

change. (For more information on the

“Address” screen, see “SELECTING THE

SEARCH AREA” on page 68.)

●The house number voice recognition

conditions are outlined below:

• Numerals: 10 digits or less

• Numerals and cardinal/intercardinal

direction or a hyphen and numerals: A

total of 9 digits or less (Do not say

“and”.)

• Cardinal/Intercardinal direction or a

hyphen and numerals: A total of 9 dig-

its or less (Do not say “and”.)

• Numerals are recognized as single

digits only.

• The cardinal/intercardinal direction

and hyphens are only recognized

once.

• The following cardinal/intercardinal

directions can be recognized: North,

East, West, South, North East, North

West, South East and South West.

●When inputting the house number is

skipped and the recognized candidate list

has multiple entries and so forth, the full

street name may need to be recognized.

If this occurs, say the full street name.

For example, say “East Main Street” and

“East Main Street” will be recognized.

VOICE COMMAND

EXAMPLE: SEARCH FOR A

TRACK USING ARTIST NAME

OR ALBUM NAME

-When “Play Artist <name>” is used to

play music, the first track is selected ran-

domly. For operations beyond playing

music, refer to the “AUDIO/VIDEO

SYSTEM” section of this manual.

313

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

-Music recognition technology and

related data are provided by

Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry

standard in music recognition

technology and related content delivery.

For more information visit

www.gracenote.com.

INFORMATION

●A USB memory or iPod must be con-

nected to enable track searching and

playback. (See “USB MEMORY OPER-

ATION” on page 254 and “iPod OPER-

ATION” on page 260.)

●When a USB memory or iPod is con-

nected, recognition data is created so

tracks can be searched using voice com-

mands.

●Recognition data is updated under the

following conditions:

• When the USB memory or iPod data

has changed.

• When the voice recognition language is

changed. (See page 54.)

●While the recognition data is being cre-

ated or being updated, a track search

cannot be performed using a voice com-

mand.

●While “Play Music” is displayed in the

“Shortcut menu” screen, say “Play music”

to display the music screen from which

searching for a track using a voice com-

mand can be performed.

●When “Play Music” is dimmed in the

“Shortcut Menu” screen, it is not possible

to search for a track using a voice com-

mand. In this situation, reduce the amount

of music data in the USB memory or iPod

and update the recognition data to

enable searching by voice command.

314

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

2. NATURAL SPEECH INFORMATION (ENGLISH ONLY)

*: Say the desired artist name or album

name in the place of the “<>”.

Due to natural language speech recog-

nition technology, this system enables

recognition of a command when spoken

naturally. However, the system cannot

recognize every variation of each com-

mand. In some situations, it is possible to

omit the command for the procedure

and directly state the desired operation.

Not all voice commands are displayed in

the short cut menu.

INFORMATION

●The “Set a Destination”, “Use the Phone”,

“Play Music” and “Get Information” com-

mands displayed on the “Shortcut Menu”

screen can be operated using natural lan-

guage speech recognition technology.

●If the command cannot be recognized

completely, the command input screen

will be displayed. (Search results will be

shown based on the part of the command

that was recognized.)

EXPRESSION EXAMPLES FOR

EACH FUNCTION

Command Expression examples

“Go Home” Let’s go home.

Take me home.

“Enter an

Address”

I wanna enter an ad-

dress, please.

Put in an address.

“Find Nearby

<POI category>”

Find nearby <Restau-

rants> for me.

I need to see the nearby

<Restaurants>.

“Call <name>

<type>”

Get me <Robert

Brown>.

I need to call <Robert

Brown> at <Work> right

away.

“Dial <number>”

Please dial the number

<3334445555>.

Ring <3334445555>.

“Play Artist

<name>”

Play the artist

<XXXXX>.

I’d like to hear the band

<XXXXX>.*

“Play Album

<name>”

Play album <XXXXX>.

Music from album

<XXXXX>.*

315

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

Command Expression examples

“Traffic” How’s the traffic?

Check the traffic.

“Weather”

What’s the weather

like?

Let’s get a forecast.

“Sports Scores”

Team scores.

How are my favorite

teams doing?

“Stock Quotes”

Stock quotes.

How are my stocks do-

ing?

“Fuel Prices”

Let’s check fuel prices.

Find the cheapest gas

prices.

INFORMATION

●Commands that are not displayed in the

“Shortcut Menu” screen can be accessed

from the main menu.

●For example, to make an “International

Call”, say “Main menu” while the “Short-

cut Menu” screen is being displayed.

Then say “Use the phone” followed by

saying the desired number, e.g.

“123456789”.

316

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

3. EXPANDED VOICE COMMANDS

1Press the talk switch.

2Say “Audio on”.

Selecting “On” next to “Expanded

Voice Commands” on the “Voice Set-

tings” screen enables voice command

operation of the audio/video and air

conditioning system. (See page 62.) For

more information on operations that can

be controlled using expanded voice

commands, refer to “COMMAND

LIST”. (See page 317.)

VOICE COMMAND

EXAMPLE: TURN THE AUDIO

SYSTEM ON

INFORMATION

●Commands relating to operation of the

audio/video and air conditioning systems

can only be performed when the audio

and air conditioning systems are turned

on.

●Expanded voice commands can be rec-

ognized when the “Shortcut Menu”

screen is displayed.

317

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

4. COMMAND LIST

-All commands are listed in the table.

-For devices that are not installed in the vehicle, the related commands will not be dis-

played in the “Shortcut Menu” screen. Also, according to conditions, other commands

may not be displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen.

-The functions available may vary according to the navigation system installed.

“Set a Destination”

*1: For example; Gas stations, Restaurants, etc.

*2: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Set a destination” while the “Shortcut

Menu” screen is being displayed.

Recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below.

-Voice recognition language can be changed. (See “SELECTING A LANGUAGE”

on page 54.)

Command Action Shortcut

“Find Nearby <POI category>” Displays a list of <POI category*1> near the cur-

rent position. O

“Enter an Address” Enables setting a destination by saying the ad-

dress. O

“Go Home” Displays the route to home. O

“Call Destination Assist” Connects Lexus Enform with Safety Connect

response center. —

“Destination by Phone

Number”*2Enables setting a destination by saying the

phone number. —

318

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

“Use the Phone” (See “BY VOICE RECOGNITION” on page 161.)

*1: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Use the phone” while the “Shortcut

Menu” screen is being displayed.

“Play Music”

*1: Say the desired artist name or album name in the place of the “<>”.

*2: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Play music” while the “Shortcut menu”

screen is being displayed.

Command Action Shortcut

“Call <name> <type>”

Calls made by saying a name from the phone-

book.

For example: Say “Call John Smith”, “Call John

Smith, mobile” etc.

“Dial <number>”

Calls made by saying the phone number.

For example: Say “Dial 911”, “Dial

5556667777” etc.

“International Call”*1Calls international numbers by saying the

phone number. —

Command Action Shortcut

“Play Artist <name>” Plays tracks by the selected artist.

For example: Say “Play artist <XXXXX>”*1O

“Play Album <name>” Plays tracks from the selected album.

For example: Say “Play album <XXXXX>”*1O

“Play Song <name>”*2Plays the selected track.

For example: Say “Play song Summertime”,

“Play song Concerto in A Major” etc.

—

“Play Playlist <name>”*2Plays tracks from the selected playlist.

For example: Say “Play playlist My Favorite

Songs”, “Play Playlist Classic Hits” etc.

—

319

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

“Get Information”

Select audio mode

When Expanded Voice Commands are turned “On”. (See page 316.)

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Command Action Shortcut

“Traffic” Displays the traffic incident list. O

“Weather” Displays weather information. O

“Sports Scores” Displays the sports list. O

“Stock Quotes” Displays the stocks list. O

“Fuel Prices” Displays the fuel prices list. O

“Lexus Insider” Displays the Lexus insider list. —

Command Action Shortcut

“Radio” Sets the audio mode to radio. O

“AM” Selects the AM band. O

“FM” Selects the FM band. O

“Satellite radio” Selects the satellite radio mode. O

“Disc” Selects the disc audio mode. O

“Auxiliary” Selects the auxiliary audio mode. O

“Bluetooth* audio” Selects the Bluetooth® audio mode. O

“iPod” Selects the iPod audio mode. O

“USB audio” Selects the USB audio mode. O

“Audio on” Turns the audio system on. O

“Audio off” Turns the audio system off. O

320

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

Climate command

When Expanded Voice Commands are turned “On”. (See page 316.)

Command Action Shortcut

“Automatic climate control” Turns air conditioning system on and off. O

“Warmer” Turns temperature up. O

“Cooler” Turns temperature down. O

INFORMATION

●Commands that have a “O” in the Shortcut Menu column can be recognized from the

“Shortcut Menu” screen.

●Commands that have a “” in the Shortcut Menu column can only be recognized from the

screen that they are displayed in.

321

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.04.18 16:48

1. MAP DATABASE VERSION

AND COVERAGE AREA ................ 322

MAP INFORMATION......................................... 322

CERTIFICATION................................................... 323

1. XM SERVICES......................................... 324

1. XM Sports .................................................. 327

RECEIVE SPORTS INFORMATION ........... 327

XM Sports SETTINGS —

ADD OR DELETE TEAMS ............................ 328

2. XM Stocks.................................................. 330

RECEIVE STOCK DATA..................................... 331

XM Stocks SETTINGS —

ADD OR DELETE STOCKS........................... 331

3. XM Fuel Prices ......................................... 333

SHOW XM Fuel Prices

INFORMATION................................................. 333

VIEW DETAILED FUEL PRICE

INFORMATION................................................. 333

XM Fuel Prices SETTINGS ................................ 334

4. XM NavWeather™................................. 337

SHOW XM NavWeather™

INFORMATION.................................................. 337

WEATHER INFORMATION........................... 339

WEATHER WARNINGS................................... 340

XM NavWeather™ INDICATOR .................. 340

5. XM NavTraffic®........................................ 341

SHOW TRAFFIC EVENT .................................... 341

SHOW XM NavTraffic®

INFORMATION................................................. 342

1. XM SETTINGS ......................................... 344

1INFORMATION DISPLAY

2XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW

3XM FUNCTION OPERATION

4SETUP

INFORMATION

322

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.04.18 16:48

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY

1. MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERAGE AREA

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Info/Apps”.

3Select “Map Data”.

-The “Map Information” screen will be dis-

played.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Info/Apps”.

2Select “Map Data” on the “Information”

screen.

3Select “Legal Info.”.

-The “Legal Information” screen will be dis-

played.

MAP INFORMATION

Coverage areas and legal information

can be displayed and map data can be

updated.

INFORMATION

●Map data updates are available for a fee.

Contact your Lexus dealer for further

information.

●The “Map Information” screen displays

“Map Version” and “Map Update

ID”. This data is needed to perform a map

data update.

LEGAL INFORMATION

Legal information related to the map

data can be displayed.

INFORMATION

323

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.04.18 16:48

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Info/Apps”.

2Select “Map Data” on the “Information”

screen.

3Select “Map Coverage”.

-The “Map Data Coverage” screen will be

displayed.

For vehicles sold in Canada

MAP COVERAGE

Map data coverage areas can be dis-

played.

CERTIFICATION

-This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS

standard(s). Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) this device

may not cause interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause

undesired operation of this device.

-Le présent appareil est conforme aux

CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables

aux appareils radio exempts de licence.

L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux

conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit

pas produire de brouillage, et (2)

l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,

même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en

compromettre le fonctionnement.

-This device complies with RSS-310 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the condition that this device does not

cause harmful interference.

-Cet appareil est conforme au CNR-310

d’Industrie Canada. Son exploitation est

autorisée sous réserve que l’appareil ne

cause pas de brouillage préjudiciable.

324

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

2. XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW

1. XM SERVICES

-With an active XM subscription, the follow-

ing features are available:

•XM Sports

*1 (See page 327.)

•XM Stocks

*1 (See page 330.)

• XM Fuel Prices*2 (See page 333.)

• XM NavWeather™*2 (See page 337.)

•XM NavTraffic

®*2 (See page 341.)

*1: Available at no extra charge with an ac-

tive XM Satellite Radio subscription.

*2: Available via separate XM subscrip-

tion(s).

-XM NavTraffic®, XM NavWeather™ and

XM TravelLink require separate XM sub-

scription(s). XM Sports*, XM Stocks* and

XM Fuel Prices are available with an XM

TravelLink subscription. After a 90-day

trial, you must contact XM and set up the

appropriate XM subscription(s) to con-

tinue receiving these services.

*: XM Sports and XM Stocks are included

with an XM Satellite Radio subscription.

-The XM NavTraffic® service is available in

the contiguous 48 U.S. states and Canada.

-The XM NavWeather™, XM Sports, XM

Stocks and XM Fuel Prices services are

available in the contiguous 48 U.S. states.

-To receive XM NavTraffic®, XM

NavWeather™, XM Sports, XM Stocks

and XM Fuel Prices services, the XM ser-

vice must be activated. To activate the ser-

vice, call the XM Listener Care Center at 1-

866-635-2349 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-438-

9677 (Canada).

-Customers should have their radio ID

ready. The radio ID can be found by select-

ing “CH 000” on the radio. For details, see

“DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID” on page

227.

XM services are subscription-based

XM Satellite Radio services to provide

convenient features to subscribers.

SUBSCRIPTION(S)

AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE(S)

ACTIVATION OF SERVICE(S)

INFORMATION

●For further details about the service, con-

tact your Lexus dealer.

●XM Satellite Radio is responsible for all

fees and services, which are subject to

change.

325

2. XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

INFORMATION

■RADIO AND ENTERTAINMENT

XM offers more than 170 satellite radio

channels of commercial-free music and

premier sports, news, talk, and

entertainment. XM is broadcast via

satellites to millions of listeners across the

continental United States. XM

subscribers listen to XM on satellite radio

receivers for the car, home, and portable

use. More information about XM is

available online at www.siriusxm.com

(U.S.A.) or www.xmradio.ca (Canada).

■INFOTAINMENT AND DATA SER-

VICES

XM offers a variety of advanced Infotain-

ment and data services.

For XM Services requiring a subscription

(such as XM Radio, and some Infotain-

ment & data services), the following para-

graph shall be included.

Required XM Radio and some

Infotainment & data services monthly

subscriptions sold separately after trial

period. Subscription fee is consumer only.

All fees and programming subject to

change. Subscriptions are subject to the

Customer Agreement available at

www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) or

www.xmradio.ca (Canada). XM service

only available in the 48 contiguous

United States and 10 Canadian

Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos

are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.

All other marks, channel names and logos

are the property of their respective

owners.

For more information, program sched-

ules, and to subscribe or extend subscrip-

tion after complimentary trial period;

more information is available at:

U.S.A. Customers

Visit www.siriusxm.com or call 1-866-

635-2349

Canadian Customers

Visit www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-

438-9677

XM RADIO SERVICES —

DESCRIPTIONS

XM RADIO SERVICES —

SUBSCRIPTION

INSTRUCTIONS

326

2. XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

Fees and Taxes — Subscription fee, taxes,

one time activation fee, and other fees

may apply. Subscription fee is consumer

only. All fees and programming subject to

change. Subscriptions subject to

Customer Agreement available at

www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) or

www.xmradio.ca (Canada). XM service

only available in the 48 contiguous

United States and Canada*.

*: Canada — some deterioration of ser-

vice may occur in extreme northern lat-

itudes. This is beyond the control of XM

Satellite Radio.

Explicit Language Notice — Channels

with frequent explicit language are indi-

cated with an “XL” preceding the channel

name. Channel blocking is available for

XM Satellite Radio receivers by notifying

XM at;

U.S.A. Customers

Visit www.siriusxm.com or calling 1-866-

635-2349

Canadian Customers

Visit www.xmradio.ca or calling 1-877-

438-9677

It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disas-

semble, reverse engineer, hack, manipu-

late, or otherwise make available any

technology or software incorporated in

receivers compatible with the XM Satel-

lite Radio System or that support the XM

website, the Online Service or any of its

content. Furthermore, the AMBE® voice

compression software included in this

product is protected by intellectual prop-

erty rights including patent rights, copy-

rights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice

Systems, Inc.

Note: this applies to XM receivers only

and not XM Ready devices.

XM RADIO SERVICES —

LEGAL DISCLAIMERS AND

WARNINGS

327

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

INFORMATION

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

1. XM Sports

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Info/Apps”.

3Select “XM Sports”.

-The “XM Sports” screen is displayed.

-The following operations can be per-

formed:

• Sports information can be received. (See

page 327.)

• XM Sports settings can be set. (See page

328.)

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Info/Apps” on the “Menu”

screen.

3Select “XM Sports” on the “Informa-

tion” screen.

XM Sports is a service included with an

XM Satellite Radio subscription. This

service is also available with an XM

TravelLink subscription. With this ser-

vice, you can receive updates via the

navigation system on your personally

selected sports teams.

RECEIVE SPORTS

INFORMATION

The desired teams must be added in or-

der to receive information. (See page

328.)

328

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

4Select the desired team to receive infor-

mation.

-Teams for which there is no current data

available will be dimmed and you will not be

able to select them.

5Select the individual information item to

hear it, or select “Read All” to hear all

available information for that team.

-The selected information will be read out in

its entirety.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Info/Apps” on the “Menu”

screen.

3Select “XM Sports” on the “Informa-

tion” screen.

4Select “Options”.

5Perform each setting according to the

procedures outlined on the following

pages.

XM Sports SETTINGS —ADD

OR DELETE TEAMS

To input your personalized XM Sports

team.

-Personalized XM Sports teams can also

be input from the “Setup” screen. (See

“XM SETTINGS” on page 344.)

329

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

INFORMATION

1Select “Add Sports Team”.

-Up to 5 teams can be added and saved in

the system for which information will be

received. The desired teams can be

changed at any time. Teams must be added

one at a time.

2Select the desired sporting league of the

team.

3Select the name of the desired team to

be added from the list that appears.

4Select “Yes” to confirm or “No” to can-

cel.

1Select “Delete Sports Teams”.

2Select the individual sports team to be

deleted or select “Select All” to delete

all the teams, and select “Delete”.

3Select “Yes” to confirm or “No” to can-

cel.

ADD SPORTS TEAM DELETE SPORTS TEAMS

330

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

2. XM Stocks

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Info/Apps”.

3Select “XM Stocks”.

-The “XM Stocks” screen is displayed.

-The following operations can be per-

formed:

• Stock data can be received. (See page

331.)

• XM Stocks setting can be set. (See page

331.)

XM Stocks is a service included with an

XM Satellite Radio subscription. This

service is also available with an XM

TravelLink subscription. With this ser-

vice, you can receive updates via the

navigation system on your personally

selected stocks.

331

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

INFORMATION

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Info/Apps” on the “Menu”

screen.

3Select “XM Stocks” on the “Informa-

tion” screen.

4Select an individual stock to hear its re-

lated data, or select “Read All” to hear

the data for all the stocks saved in the

system.

-The selected data will be read out in its

entirety.

-Stock data may be delayed by approxi-

mately 20 minutes.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Info/Apps” on the “Menu”

screen.

3Select “XM Stocks” on the “Informa-

tion” screen.

4Select “Options”.

5Perform each setting according to the

procedures outlined on the following

pages.

RECEIVE STOCK DATA

You must first add your desired stocks

prior to receiving data. (See page 331.)

XM Stocks SETTINGS —ADD

OR DELETE STOCKS

To input your personalized XM Stocks

settings.

-Personalized XM Stocks settings can

also be input from the “Setup” screen.

(See “XM SETTINGS” on page 344.)

332

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Select “Add Stock”.

2Input the desired stock symbol.

3When finished, select “OK”.

-Up to 10 individual stock symbols can be

added and saved in the system for which

information will be received. Stocks must

be input one at a time. To enter a stock, the

symbol of the desired stock must be known.

1Select “Delete Stocks”.

2Select the individual stock to be deleted

or select “Select All” to delete all the

stocks, and select “Delete”.

3Select “Yes” to confirm or “No” to can-

cel.

ADD STOCK DELETE STOCKS

333

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

INFORMATION

3. XM Fuel Prices

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Info/Apps”.

3Select “XM Fuel Prices”.

-The “Fuel Price” screen is displayed.

Gas station name

Sort

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Info/Apps” on the “Menu”

screen.

3Select “XM Fuel Prices” on the “Infor-

mation” screen.

4Select the desired gas station from the

list.

-The location of the selected gas station will

be displayed on the map screen.

XM Fuel Prices is a service included

with an XM TravelLink subscription. It

enables the navigation system to display

current fuel prices and gas station loca-

tions, which can be set as a destination if

desired.

SHOW XM Fuel Prices

INFORMATION

XM Fuel Prices SCREEN

VIEW DETAILED FUEL PRICE

INFORMATION

334

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

5Select “Info”.

-When the map scale is at the maximum

range of 0.5 miles (800 m), is not

shown. When the map scale is at the mini-

mum range of 150 ft. (50 m), is not

shown.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Setup”.

“Mark”: Select to mark the selected gas

station on the map screen.

“Go to ”: Select to set the selected gas

station as a destination with route direc-

tions.

“Add to Route”: Select to add the select-

ed gas station as a destination.

“Detail”: Select to read the selected gas

station’s information.

-If is selected, the registered

phone number can be called.

INFORMATION

●The information displayed is received via

satellite radio. Depending on the time the

information is received, the displayed

information may not be up to date.

XM Fuel Prices SETTINGS

The desired fuel type, preferred brand,

and show prices reported can be regis-

tered.

335

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

INFORMATION

3Select “Other”.

4Select “XM Fuel Prices”.

5Select “Fuel Type”.

6Select the desired fuel type.

-“Premium”, “Midgrade”, “Regular” or

“Diesel” can be selected.

7Select “Save”.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Other” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select “XM Fuel Prices” on the “Other

Settings” screen.

4Select “Preferred Brand”.

5Select the preferred brand.

6Select “Save”.

BRAND

336

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

2Select “Other” on the “Setup” screen.

3Select “XM Fuel Prices” on the “Other

Settings” screen.

4Select “Show Prices Reported”.

5Select the desired period.

-“Last 24 Hours”, “Last 2 Days” or “Show

All” can be selected.

-If “Show All” is selected, information about

gas stations which fuel prices are not pro-

vided is also displayed on the list.

6Select “Save”.

REPORTED

337

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

INFORMATION

4. XM NavWeather™

-The following operations can be per-

formed:

• Show XM NavWeather™ information:

Weather forecast information is displayed

on the map screen. (See page 337.)

• Weather information: Weather informa-

tion for the selected city is displayed. (See

page 339.)

• Weather warnings: Weather warnings

issued within a radius of approximately 15

miles (25 km) or 7.8 miles (12.5 km)

around the vehicle are displayed on the

warning screen. (See page 340.)

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Info/Apps”.

3Select “XM NavWeather”.

-The XM NavWeather screen is displayed.

“Info.”

-When the city icon is selected, “Info.” is dis-

played on the map screen. Selecting this

screen button displays the “Forecast”

screen. (See page 339.)

The subscription-based XM

NavWeather™ service allows the navi-

gation system to display weather infor-

mation on the map screen.

SHOW XM NavWeather™

INFORMATION

XM NavWeather™ SCREEN

338

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

City icon

-When this screen button is selected, city

names and “Info.” are displayed on the

upper part of the screen.

“Forecast”

-When this screen button is selected, the

city selection screen is displayed.

• Select a city to display weather informa-

tion. Weather information of the selected

city will be displayed. (See page 339.)

“Current Location”

-When “Current Location” is selected, the

current position is displayed.

Zoom in/out screen button

-The scale of the map can be changed.

Three zoom levels can be selected; 16 miles

(26 km), 30 miles (48 km) and 60 miles

(97 km).

Weather icons and grids

-Inclement weather information is displayed

on the map using weather icons and grids.

Selecting an icon shows the related infor-

mation at the top of the screen.

Icon Weather

Tornado

Hurricane

Storm

Flood

Winter

Wind

Extremes

Other

Hail storm

Severe thunderstorm

Heavy fog

Heavy freezing rain/ice

Heavy snow

Heavy rain

339

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

INFORMATION

-When the specified day’s weather screen

button is selected, weather information for

a specified day is displayed.

WEATHER INFORMATION

No. Function

Received time

City name

Today’s date

Current weather

Current temperature

Today’s weather

Tomorrow’s weather

Day after tomorrow’s weather

Observed time (Time elapsed since

last update)

Specified day’s weather

No. Function

Daytime weather

Nighttime weather

Maximum temperature

Minimum temperature

Precipitation probability

340

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

“Weather Map”: When this screen button is

selected, the “XM NavWeather” screen is

displayed.

“OK”: When this screen button is selected,

the screen returns to the map of the current

position.

-When an XM NavWeather™ warning is

issued within the vicinity, the XM

NavWeather™ indicator will appear on the

map screen.

WEATHER WARNINGS

Weather warnings issued within a radius

of approximately 15 miles (25 km) or

7.8 miles (12.5 km) around the vehicle

are displayed on the warning screen.

XM NavWeather™ INDICATOR

341

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

INFORMATION

5. XM NavTraffic®

The following operations can be performed:

-Show XM NavTraffic® Information: Traffic

information is displayed on the map screen.

(See page 342.)

-Auto Avoid Traffic: If any heavy congestion

or moderate traffic has been detected on

the guidance route, it may be possible for

you to select another route offered by the

system. (See page 127.)

-Traffic Incident Warning: Traffic congestion

information is provided using voice guid-

ance. (See page 64.)

-Show Free Flowing Traffic: Freely flowing

traffic is shown by the arrow on the map.

(See page 128.)

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Info/Apps”.

3Select “Traffic Incidents”.

-A list of current traffic incidents is displayed

along with information on the incident’s dis-

tance and position relative to the vehicle.

The subscription-based XM NavTraffic®

service allows the navigation system to

display traffic information on the map

screen.

INFORMATION

●When the “Traffic Information” indicator

is dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic Incident

Warning” and “Show Free Flowing Traffic”

will not operate. (See page 342.)

SHOW TRAFFIC EVENT

342

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

4Select the desired traffic event.

“On Current Route”: Select to display the

traffic congestion information for the select-

ed route, or the road which the current ve-

hicle is on. If a route has not been set, “On

Current Road” will be displayed.

5This screen is displayed.

-Guidance route traffic information is dis-

played on the screen. Select “Detail” to

display detailed traffic event information.

1Select “Show on Map”.

2Select “Traffic Information”.

-The “Traffic Information” indicator is high-

lighted.

3XM NavTraffic® information is dis-

played on the map screen.

On the map screen

On the freeway information screen

SHOW XM NavTraffic®

INFORMATION

343

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

INFORMATION

XM NavTraffic® icon

-When any traffic information is received,

the XM NavTraffic® icon will appear on

the map screen. Selecting the XM

NavTraffic® icon on the screen will start

voice guidance for the traffic information.

(See page 44.)

-When the XM NavTraffic® icon is

selected, voice guidance for the traffic

information will start even if “Off” for “Traf-

fic Incident Warning” is selected.

XM NavTraffic® information arrow

-When any XM NavTraffic® information is

received, the XM NavTraffic® information

arrow will appear on the map screen. The

color of the arrow changes depending on

the traffic information received.

XM NavTraffic® indicator

-When any XM NavTraffic® information is

received, the XM NavTraffic® indicator will

appear on the screen. The color of the indi-

cator changes depending on the traffic

information received.

*: Selecting the XM NavTraffic® indicator

will start voice guidance.

Color Function

Red Heavy congestion

Ye l l o w Moderate traffic

Green Freely flowing traffic

Color Function

White Traffic information has been

received.

Ye l l o w

Traffic restriction informa-

tion on the guidance route

has been received (screen

button*).

Red

Congestion information on

the guidance route has been

received (screen button*).

344

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

4. SETUP

1. XM SETTINGS

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Setup”.

3Select “Other”.

4Select the item to be set.

-On this screen, the following functions can

be performed:

Used for changing settings for XM

Sports, XM Stocks and XM Fuel Prices.

No. Function Page

Select to set XM Sports. 327

Select to set XM Stocks. 330

Select to set XM Fuel Pric-

es. 333

345

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.04.18 16:48

1. FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW............... 346

2. TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED

BY USING A CELLULAR

PHONE.................................................... 347

BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION ............. 349

PREPARATION BEFORE USING

APPS......................................................................... 350

3. TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED

BY USING DCM AND THE

NAVIGATION SYSTEM................... 352

BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION ............. 353

4. TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED

BY USING DCM .................................. 355

1. APPS ............................................................ 356

ACTIVATING “APPS”......................................... 356

LINKING “APPS” AND NAVIGATION

LOCAL FUNCTION ....................................... 359

INPUTTING KEYWORD

OPERATION ......................................................... 361

2. Destination Assist..................................... 363

MAKE A CALL WITH

Destination Assist ................................................ 363

3. eDestination............................................... 365

DOWNLOAD eDestinations ........................... 365

RETRIEVE AN eDestination.............................. 366

SHOW eDestination ICONS............................. 367

4. Lexus Insider .............................................. 368

VIEW AND PLAY RECEIVED

Lexus Insider MESSAGES.............................. 368

NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION.............. 370

Lexus Insider SETTINGS ....................................... 371

1LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY

CONNECT-OVERVIEW 2LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY

CONNECT OPERATION

LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT

346

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW

1. FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

-The functions included in Lexus Enform with Safety Connect are classified into the fol-

lowing three types.

Type A: Function achieved by using a cellular phone

Type B: Function achieved by using an embedded cellular device in the vehicle

(DCM: Data Communication Module) and the navigation system

Type C: Function achieved by using DCM

-Each function is available in the following areas:

• Apps is available in the 48 states, D.C. and Alaska.

• Destination Assist and eDestination are available in the contiguous United States.

• Lexus Insider is available in the contiguous 48 states and Canada.

• Safety Connect includes four features.

Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle Location

are available in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada, and

Enhanced Roadside Assistance is available in the United States (except Hawaii) and in

Canada.

Lexus Enform with Safety Connect is a feature that includes Apps, Destination Assist,

eDestination, Lexus Insider, and Safety Connect.

Function Type

Apps Type A

Destination Assist Type B

eDestination Type B

Lexus Insider Type B

Safety Connect Type C

INFORMATION

●The actual service availability is dependent on the network condition.

347

1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT

2. TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING A CELLULAR PHONE

Of the functions included with Lexus Enform with Safety Connect, only Apps can be

achieved by using a cellular phone.

Apps is a service that enables the usable contents of a cellular phone to be displayed

on and operated from the navigation screen. Before Apps can be used, a few settings

need to be performed. (See page 350.)

348

1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

*: For known compatible phones, refer to http://www.lexus.com/bluetooth/.

No. Name Function

Contents provider Provides contents to the navigation system via a cellular phone.

Application server Provides applications to the navigation system via a cellular

phone.

Cellular phone*

Using the Apps application, communication is relayed between

the navigation system, the application server and the contents

provider.

A cellular phone cannot be operated while communicating.

Application player Runs applications on the navigation system. The navigation sys-

tem is equipped with an application player.

Applications

(“Apps”)

Displays and sounds the usable contents from the contents pro-

viders via a cellular phone on the application player.

Navigation system Contents received, via a cellular phone, from the contents pro-

vider servers are displayed on the navigation screen.

349

1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW

LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

-Apps will be available on a trial period

included upon purchase of a new vehicle.

User registration is required to start using

the service. (See page 351.)

-When a trial period has elapsed after pur-

chasing a new vehicle, a fee will be charged

to renew the contract.*

-Services requiring a separate contract can

also be used.*

*: For details, refer to http://www.lexus.com/

enform/ or call 1-800-255-3987.

-Apps is available in the 48 states, D.C. and

Alaska.

-The following personal data can be deleted

and returned to their default settings:

• Downloaded contents

• Radio stations that were listened to

•Input history

BEFORE USING THE

FUNCTION

SUBSCRIPTION

AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE

INFORMATION

●When using Apps, depending on the

details of your cellular phone contract,

data usage fees may apply. Confirm data

usage fees before using this service.

●In this section, the required operations to

activate “Apps”, connect a cellular phone

to the navigation system and registration

steps for Apps are explained. For details

regarding Apps operations and each of

the “Apps”, refer to http://

www.lexus.com/enform/.

INITIALIZING PERSONAL

DATA

The personal data used in “Apps” can be

reset. (See “DELETING PERSONAL

DATA” on page 61.)

INFORMATION

●Once initialized, data will be erased. Pay

close attention when initializing the data.

350

1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

Perform the settings in the following order.

In order to use Apps, the following settings

must first be performed:

-User registration with the service contract

(See page 350.)

-Download the Apps application onto your

cellular phone, and login to the application.

(See page 351.)

-Register the cellular phone that the Apps

application was downloaded to with the

navigation system. (See page 351.)

-Register a Bluetooth® phone with the

hands-free system. (For detailed informa-

tion about registration and settings, see

“Bluetooth® SETTINGS” on page 194.)

1Perform user registration from the des-

ignated web address.

PREPARATION BEFORE

USING APPS

SETTINGS REQUIRED TO USE

APPS

1User registration

2Download the Apps application to

your cellular phone.

3Register the cellular phone with the

navigation system.

USER REGISTRATION

When purchasing the vehicle, an email

address is registered at your Lexus deal-

er. If your email address was not regis-

tered at your Lexus dealer, your email

address can be registered at the Lexus

drivers website. A user registration

guidance email containing a web ad-

dress will be sent.

INFORMATION

●If your email address was not registered

at your Lexus dealer when the vehicle

was purchased, an email address can be

registered at http://www.lexus.com/

enform/.

351

1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW

LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

1Download the Apps application using

your cellular phone.

2Run the Apps application on your cellu-

lar phone.

3Enter a user name and password into

the Apps application. Login to the appli-

cation.

REGISTERING THE APPS

APPLICATION

INFORMATION

●“Apps” can only be used when the Apps

application has been downloaded to your

cellular phone and the application is run-

ning.

●Apps operational procedures can also be

confirmed by visiting http://

www.lexus.com/enform/.

●In order to use “Apps”, it is necessary to

run the Apps application, enter your user

name and password and display the main

menu on the cellular phone.

●An iPhone cannot be connected via

Bluetooth® and USB connection at the

same time. However, it is possible to

recharge an iPhone while using Apps by

connecting via USB. The system uses the

connection method that was used last.

Therefore, if connected via USB after

Bluetooth® connection, it is necessary to

reconnect the iPhone via Bluetooth®.

352

1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

3. TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM AND THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Of the functions included with Lexus Enform with Safety Connect, Destination Assist,

eDestination, and Lexus Insider can be achieved by making DCM cooperate with the

navigation system.

These are subscription-based telematics services that use Global Positioning System

(GPS) data, embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security as well as

convenience features to subscribers.

The services are supported by Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24

hours per day, 7 days per week.

The services are available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped

vehicles.

No. Name No. Name

Lexus’ designated response center DCM

TEL, GPS antenna Navigation system

353

1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW

LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

-After you have signed the Telematics Sub-

scription Service Agreement and are

enrolled, you can begin receiving services.

A variety of subscription terms is available

for purchase. Contact your Lexus dealer,

call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-

3987), or select “Destination Assist” in

your vehicle for further subscription details.

(See page 363.)

-Destination Assist and eDestination are

available in the contiguous United States.

-Lexus Insider is available in the contiguous

48 states and Canada.

-Enrollment in Lexus Enform with Safety

Connect (via your dealership) is required

to activate all services.

BEFORE USING THE

FUNCTION

SUBSCRIPTION

AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE(S)

ACTIVATION OF SERVICE(S)

-Certification for Lexus Enform with

Safety Connect

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

FCC ID: O9EGTM1

FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101

FCC ID: N7NGTM2

354

1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

INFORMATION

●Exposure to radio frequency signals:

The Lexus Enform with Safety Connect

system installed in your vehicle is a low

power radio transmitter and receiver. The

system receives and also sends out radio

frequency (RF) signals.

●In August 1996, the Federal Communi-

cations Commission (FCC) adopted RF

exposure guidelines with safety levels for

mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines

are consistent with the safety standards

previously set by both U.S. and interna-

tional standards bodies.

• ANSI (American National Standards

Institute) C95.1 [1992]

• NCRP (National Council on Radiation

Protection and Measurement) Report

86 [1986]

• ICNIRP (International Commission on

Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection)

[1996]

●Those standards were based on compre-

hensive and periodic evaluations of the

relevant scientific literature. Over 120

scientists, engineers, and physicians from

universities, government health agen-

cies, and industry reviewed the available

body of research to develop the ANSI

Standard (C95.1).

●The design of Lexus Enform with Safety

Connect complies with the FCC guide-

lines in addition to those standards.

INFORMATION

●Available beginning Fall 2009 on select

Lexus models. Contact with the Lexus

Enform with Safety Connect response

center is dependent upon the telematics

device being in operative condition, cel-

lular connection availability, navigation

map data, and GPS satellite signal recep-

tion, which can limit the ability to reach

the response center or receive support.

Enrollment and Telematics Subscription

Service Agreement required. A variety of

subscription terms is available; charges

vary by subscription term selected.

●The Lexus Enform with Safety Connect

response center will offer support in mul-

tiple languages.

●Select Lexus Enform with Safety Con-

nect-subscribed vehicles are capable of

communicating vehicle information, trig-

gering owner reminder notifications.

Owners who do not wish to have their

vehicle transmit this information can opt

out of the service at the time of enroll-

ment or by calling 1-800-255-3987 and

follow the prompt for Lexus Enform with

Safety Connect.

●For further details about the service, con-

tact your Lexus dealer.

●Lexus Enform with Safety Connect ser-

vices are not subject to section 255 of

the Telecommunications Act and the

device is not TTY compatible.

355

1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:18

LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT

4. TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM

Of the functions included with Lexus Enform with Safety Connect, Safety Connect

can be achieved by using DCM.

For details, refer to “Owner’s Manual”.

356

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:19

2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION

1. APPS

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Info/Apps”.

3Select “Apps”.

4A screen indicating that updates are be-

ing checked for will be displayed.

5Select “OK”.

-To c a n c e l u p d at i n g , s el e c t “Cancel”.

-After selecting “Cancel”, the “Information”

screen will be displayed.

-The “Information” screen will also be dis-

played if updating fails.

ACTIVATING “APPS”

Each time “Apps” is activated, the sys-

tem checks for updates. When there are

no updates available, the main menu

screen will be displayed right after a

screen indicating that updates are being

checked for has been displayed.

ACTIVATING “APPS”

357

2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION

LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:19

6A screen indicating that an update is in

progress will be displayed.

-To stop updating, select “Cancel”.

-After selecting “Cancel”, the “Information”

screen will be displayed.

-The “Information” screen will also be dis-

played if updating fails.

7Select “OK”.

8When updating is complete, the main

menu screen will be displayed.

-The screen shown above is only an exam-

ple. The actual screen may be different.

-For details about the function and service

of each application displayed in the main

menu, refer to http://www.lexus.com/

enform/.

358

2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:19

IF A MESSAGE APPEARS ON THE SCREEN

When problems occur starting up the application player, a message will appear on the

screen. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested cor-

rective action.

Message Display conditions Corrective action

“This feature is unavailable

during an emergency call.”

Safety Connect is being im-

plemented.

After Safety Connect is fin-

ished, perform the operation

again.

“This feature is unavailable

while transferring contacts.”

Contacts are being trans-

ferred manually from the

phonebook.

When the transfer of contacts

is complete, perform the op-

eration.

“There is a problem with the

Bluetooth* connection.

For troubleshooting assis-

tance, please visit lexus.com

or call 1-800-255-3987.”

The cellular phone cannot be

connected.

Refer to http://www.lexus.com/

enform/ to confirm if the

phone is compatible or not.

“This feature is unavailable

during a handsfree call.”

A hands-free call is in

progress.

After the hands-free call is fin-

ished, perform the operation.

“To use the services, an active

application needs to be run-

ning on your phone. For more

information, please visit

lexus.com.”

The Apps application cannot

be connected to Bluetooth*

SPP.

Refer to http://www.lexus.com/

enform/ to confirm if the

phone is Bluetooth* SPP com-

patible or not, and then acti-

vate the Apps application.

“Communication error.

Please try again.”

Communication was discon-

nected.

After a few moments, retry the

operation.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

359

2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION

LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:19

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Info/Apps”.

3Select “Apps”.

4A screen indicating that updates are be-

ing checked for will be displayed.

5When updating is complete, the main

menu screen will be displayed.

-The screen shown above is only an exam-

ple. The actual screen may be different.

-For details about the function and service

of each application displayed in the main

menu, refer to http://www.lexus.com/

enform/.

LINKING “APPS” AND

NAVIGATION LOCAL

FUNCTION

The navigation system’s setting a desti-

nation and making a hands-free call can

be performed via “Apps”.

INFORMATION

●Some parts of “Apps” can be adjusted

using the switches on the steering wheel.

360

2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:19

1Select “Map”.

2Select “Go to ”.

3To start guidance, select “OK”.

1Select “Call”.

2Select “Yes”.

-To cancel making a phone call, select “Can-

cel”.

3A screen indicating that a call is in

progress will be displayed.

SETTING A DESTINATION

USING “APPS”

Locations that were searched using

“Apps” can be set as a destination.

-For the operation of the route guidance

screen and the function of each screen

button, see “STARTING ROUTE GUID-

ANCE” on page 87.

MAKING A PHONE CALL

USING “APPS”

Phone calls can be made to locations

which were searched using “Apps”.

-For phone operation and the function of

each screen button, see “TALK ON THE

Bluetooth® PHONE” on page 166.

361

2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION

LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:19

1Select the character input space.

2Select the screen buttons to input the de-

sired characters, and then select “OK”.

3Input characters will be reflected on the

character input space.

1Select the microphone screen button.

INPUTTING KEYWORD

OPERATION

A keyword can be input to “Apps” by the

software keyboard or voice recognition

function.

-The keyboard layout can be changed.

(See page 55.)

INPUTTING A KEYWORD

USING THE SOFTWARE

KEYBOARD

-For details on operating the keyboard,

see “INPUTTING LETTERS AND

NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERA-

TION” on page 35.

INPUTTING A KEYWORD

USING THE VOICE

RECOGNITION FUNCTION

Voice recognition is a function that uses

the center’s database to enable the use

of the voice recognition function.

362

2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:19

2When this screen is displayed, say the

desired keyword.

-Completion of saying the keyword will be

detected automatically.

3Search results will be displayed on the

screen.

-The screen shown above is only an exam-

ple. The actual screen may be different.

363

2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:19

LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT

2. Destination Assist

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Destination”.

3Select “Destination Assist”.

-The “Destination Assist” screen is dis-

played.

Destination Assist provides you with live

assistance for finding destinations via the

Lexus Enform with Safety Connect re-

sponse center. You can request either a

specific business, address, or ask for

help locating your desired destination

by category, such as restaurants, gas

stations, shopping centers or other

Points of Interest (POI).

After you tell the agent your choice of

destination, its coordinates are sent

wirelessly to your vehicle’s navigation

system.

MAKE A CALL WITH

Destination Assist

364

2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:19

4When an agent comes on the line, tell

the agent the address, business name,

or the type of POI or service you would

like to locate.

-To adjust the call volume, select “–” or “+”

on the “Destination Assist” screen, or use

the volume switch on the steering wheel

during the call.

-To hang up the phone, select “Disconnect”

on the “Destination Assist” screen or press

the switch on the steering wheel.

5After the agent helps you determine

your location of choice, this screen is

displayed.

Select the button of the screen for the

appropriate action.

“Mark”: Select to mark the POI on the

navigation map.

“Map”: Select to display the POI on the

navigation map.

“Go”: Select to set the POI as a destina-

tion with route directions.

“Detail”: Select to read the POI notes you

entered online, if any.

-If is selected, the registered

phone number can be called.

365

2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:19

LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT

3. eDestination

-Locations can be organized into up to 20

personalized folders.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Destination”.

3Select “Point of Interest”.

With the eDestination feature, you can

go online, via the Lexus.com owner’s

Web site, to select and organize desti-

nations of your choice and then wire-

lessly send them to your vehicle’s

navigation system. Up to 200 locations

can be stored online and accessed or

updated at any time.

INFORMATION

●You must first go online at

www.lexus.com/drivers/ to view the

Owners site where you will need to regis-

ter and log in. After this, personalized

folders that contains the locations to be

sent to your vehicle can be created. (See

Lexus Enform with Safety Connect

Guide for more information.)

DOWNLOAD eDestinations

After updating eDestination folders on-

line, the information to update the data in

the vehicle will be needed to download.

366

2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:19

4Select “eDestination”.

-The “eDestination” screen is displayed.

5Select “Download”.

6Select “Yes” to confirm or “No” to can-

cel download.

-When “Yes” is selected, your most recent

online eDestination data will be loaded to

the navigation system.

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”

on page 10.)

2Select “Destination” on the “Menu”

screen.

3Select “Point of Interest” on the “Desti-

nation” screen.

4Select “eDestination” on the “Point of

Interest” screen.

5Select the desired eDestination folder.

6Select the desired location.

RETRIEVE AN eDestination

367

2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION

LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:19

7Select the button of the screen for the

appropriate action.

1Select “Show on Map”.

2Select “eDestination Icons”.

-The “eDestination Icons” indicator is high-

lighted.

“Mark”: Select to mark the POI on the

navigation map.

“Map”: Select to display the POI on the

navigation map.

“Go”: Select to set the POI as a destina-

tion with route directions.

“Detail”: Select to read the POI notes you

entered online, if any.

-If is selected, the registered

phone number can be called.

SHOW eDestination ICONS

368

2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:19

4. Lexus Insider

1Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2Select “Info/Apps”.

3Select “LEXUS Insider”.

-The “LEXUS Insider” screen is displayed.

4Select the desired article title from the

Lexus Insider menu to play that broad-

cast or select “Read All” to listen to all

stored Lexus Insider broadcasts.

-When “Read All” is selected, “Stop” is dis-

played. To stop listening to the broadcast,

select “Stop”.

-To disrupt the audio read of Lexus Insider,

press the “MODE” switch on the steering

wheel, or press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA”

button on the audio system.

Lexus Insider is an optional service that

can send audio messages, or articles, to

participating owners’ vehicles via the

navigation system. Potential Lexus Insid-

er subjects might include, for example,

Lexus vehicle technology tips, updates

on regional Lexus events, or audio ex-

cerpts from Lexus Magazine articles.

Up to 20 articles can be stored at a time.

You may opt out of receiving Lexus In-

sider messages at any time. (See page

370.)

VIEW AND PLAY RECEIVED

Lexus Insider MESSAGES

369

2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION

LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT

ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)

12.05.07 10:19

-Icons appear at the left of the Lexus Insider

story titles and indicate the following:

1After selecting an individual article, se-

lect “Next” or “Previous” to listen to an-

Lexus OM33A07U

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation